CX410e - Printer LEXMARK - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL CX410e LEXMARK

July 2012 www.lexmark.com

Machine type(s):

7527

Model(s):

415, 436

Contents

Safety information....7

Learning about the printer....9

Finding information about the printer....9

Selecting a location for the printer....10

Printer configurations....11

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner....12

Using the ADF and scanner glass....13

Understanding the printer control panel....14

Using the printer control panel....14

Understanding the home screen....14

Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights....16

Using the touch-screen buttons....16

Setting up and using the home screen applications....18

Finding the IP address of the computer....18

Finding the IP address of the printer....18

Accessing the Embedded Web Server....19

Customizing the home screen....19

Understanding the different applications....19

Activating the home screen applications....20

Finding information about the home screen applications....20

Setting up Forms and Favorites 20

Setting up Card Copy 21

Using MyShortcut 22

Setting up Multi Send 22

Setting up Scan to Network 23

Setting up Remote Operator Panel....24

Exporting and importing a configuration....24

Additional printer setup....26

Installing internal options....26

Installing hardware options....33

Attaching cables....35

Setting up the printer software....37

Networking....38

Verifying printer setup....43

Loading paper and specialty media....44

Setting the paper size and type....44

Configuring Universal paper settings....44

Loading the 250- and 550-sheet tray....44

Loading the manual feeder....47

Loading the 650-sheet duo tray....48

Loading the multipurpose feeder....49

Linking and unlinking trays....51

Paper and specialty media guide....54

Using specialty media....54

Paper guidelines....57

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights....60

Printing....64

Printing forms....64

Printing a document....64

Printing from a flash drive....66

Printing confidential and other held jobs....68

Printing information pages....70

Canceling a print job....70

Copying....72

Making copies....72

Copying photos....73

Copying on specialty media....73

Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel....74

Customizing copy settings....74

Placing information on copies....79

Canceling a copy job....80

Understanding the copy options....81

E-mailing....84

Setting up the printer to e-mail....84

Creating an e-mail shortcut....84

E-mailing a document....85

Customizing e-mail settings....87

Canceling an e-mail....88

Understanding the e-mail options....88

Faxing....91

Setting up the printer to fax....91

Sending a fax....105

Creating shortcuts....108

Customizing fax settings....108

Canceling an outgoing fax....110

Holding and forwarding faxes....110

Understanding the fax options....111

Scanning....114

Using Scan to Network....114

Scanning to an FTP address....114

Scanning to a computer or flash drive....116

Understanding the scan options....118

Understanding printer menus....121

Menus list....121

Supplies menu....122

Paper menu....123

Reports menu....132

Network/Ports....133

Security menu....142

Settings menu....145

Saving money and the environment....198

Saving paper and toner....198

Saving energy....199

Recycling....203

Securing the printer....205

Using the security lock feature....205

Statement of Volatility....205

Erasing volatile memory....206

Erasing non-volatile memory....206

Erasing printer hard disk memory....207

Configuring printer hard disk encryption....207

Finding printer security information....208

Maintaining the printer....209

Storing supplies....209

Cleaning the printer parts....209

Checking the status of parts and supplies....211

Estimated number of remaining pages....211

Ordering supplies....212

Replacing supplies....214

Moving the printer....234

Managing the printer....235

Finding advanced networking and administrator information....235

Checking the virtual display....235

Setting up e-mail alerts....235

Viewing reports....235

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server....236

Modifying confidential print settings....237

Copying printer settings to other printers....237

Restoring factory default settings....237

Clearing jams....239

Avoiding jams....239

Understanding jam messages and locations....240

[x]-page jam, clear standard bin [203.xx]....241

[x]-page jam, open front door to clear fuser [202.xx]....244

[x]-page jam, open front door [20y.xx]....247

[x]-page jam, open front door to clear duplex [23y.xx]....248

[x]-page jam, open tray [x] [24y.xx]....249

[x]-page jam, clear manual feeder [251.xx]....251

[x]-page jam, clear multipurpose feeder [250.xx]....251

[x]-page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]....253

Troubleshooting....255

Understanding the printer messages....255

Solving printer problems....269

Solving print problems....275

Solving copy problems....302

Solving fax problems....306

Solving scanner problems....311

Solving home screen applications problems....316

Embedded Web Server does not open....316

Contacting customer support....318

Notices....319

Product information....319

Edition notice....319

Power consumption....323

Index....335

Safety information

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.

Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off the optional tray, and then set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same time.

Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.

Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

Use only the telecommunications (RJ-11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.

This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Learning about the printer

Finding information about the printer

What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:•Connecting the printer•Installing the printer software	Setup documentation—The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available at http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media•Loading paper•Configuring printer settings•Viewing and printing documents and photos•Setting up and using the printer software•Configuring the printer on a network•Caring for and maintaining the printer•Troubleshooting and solving problems	User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides may be available on the Software and Documentation CD. For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
Instructions for:•Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network•Troubleshooting printer connection problems	Networking Guide—Open the Software and Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking Guide link.
Help using the printer software	Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program or application, and then click Help.Click ? to view context-sensitive information.Notes:•Help is automatically installed with the printer software.•The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop, depending on your operating system.
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer support:•Documentation•Driver downloads•Live chat support•E-mail support•Voice support	Lexmark Support Web site—http://support.lexmark.comNote:Select your country or region, and then select your product to view the appropriate support site.Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer.Record the following information (located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster:•Machine Type number•Serial number•Date purchased•Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:	In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer, or athttp://support.lexmark.com.In other countries and regions—See the printed warranty that came with your printer.

Selecting a location for the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:

• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:

—Clean, dry, and free of dust.
—Away from stray staples and paper clips.
—Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
—Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.

- Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:

Ambient temperature 16 to 32°C (60 to 90°F)

Storage temperature -40 to 43°C (-40 to 110°F)

- Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

1 2 3 4 5

1 Right side 305 mm (12 in.)

2 Front 508 mm (20 in.)

3 Left side 76 mm (3 in.)

4 Rear 101.6 mm (4 in.)

5 Top 762 mm (30 in.)

Printer configurations

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

Basic models

Labeled diagram of a printer with numbered parts for identification

Exterior view of a modern printer with labeled parts (no text or symbols on the device itself)

1 Printer control panel

2 Automatic document feeder (ADF)

3 Standard bin

4 Top door latch

5 Right side cover

6 Standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1)

7 Manual feeder

8 Optional 650-sheet duo tray with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)

9 Optional 550-sheet tray (Tray 3)

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner

• Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, or an FTP destination.
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).

Using the ADF and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Exterior view of a printer with paper labeled ABC, showing no visible text or symbols on the device itself.

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.

3D rendering of an open printer with a red-labeled paperclip inserted (no visible text or symbols)

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Using the ADF

When using the ADF:

• Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
• Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
• Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches) wide to 216 x 355 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) long.
• Scan media weights from 52 to 120g / m^2 (14 to 32 lb).
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Using the scanner glass

When using the scanner glass:

• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
• Scan or copy documents from 216 x 296.9 mm (8.5 x 11.69 inches) dimension.
  •Copy books up to 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) thick.

Understanding the printer control panel

Using the printer control panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

	Use the To
1 Display		•View the printer status and messages.•Set up and operate the printer.
2 Home button Go to the home screen.
3 Help button Go to the Help menus.
4	Clear all / Reset button	Reset the default settings of a function, such as printing, copying, or e-mailing.
5 Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
6 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
7 Cancel button Cancel all printer activity.
8 Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
9 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
10 USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer.Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.

Understanding the home screen

When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or respond to messages.

Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

1 2 3 4 Copy Fax Email FTP Ready. 5 7 6

Touch To
1 Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
2 Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
3	E-mail	Access the E-mail menus and send e-mails.
4	FTP	Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
5 Menu icon Access printer menus.Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in ready state.
6 Status message bar		Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.Show printer supply conditions such as Imaging unit low or Cartridge Low.Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them.
7 Status/Supplies		Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing.View more information on the printer warning or message, and on how to clear it.

This may also appear on the home screen:

Touch To
Search Held Jobs Search current held jobs.
Jobs by user Access print jobs saved by user.
Profiles and Solutions Access profiles and solutions.

Features

Feature Description
Attendance message alert	If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks.
Warning	If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Printer IP addressExample: 123.123.123.123	The IP address of your printer is located at the top left corner of the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server to view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.

Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights

The colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.

Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status

Indicator light Printer status
Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.

Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status

Sleep button light Printer status
Off The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow, pulsing pattern	The printer is in Hibernate mode.

Using the touch-screen buttons

Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

Copy from Letter (8.5 x 11 in) Copy from Letter (8.5 x 11 in) Plain Paper Scale Auto 100% Darkness Side (Duplex) 1 to 2 Sided Collate On Content Text/Photo Save As Shortcut Advanced Options Copy It 7 6 5 4 3 2

	Touch To
1	Arrows View a list of options.
2	Copy It Print a copy.
3	Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4	Home Go to the home screen.
5	Increase Select a higher value.
6	Decrease Select a lower value.
7	Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.

Other touch-screen buttons

Touch To
Accept		Save a setting.
Cancel		•Cancel an action or a selection.•Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset		Reset values on the screen.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Notes:

• Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in select printer models.
• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. To learn more, visit www.lexmark.com or inquire at your point of purchase.

Finding the IP address of the computer

Note: Make sure that you know how your printer and computer are connected to the network (Ethernet or wireless).

The computer IP address is required when setting up home screen applications, such as:

• Forms and Favorites
• Multi Send
• Scan to Network

For Windows users

1 Click 📄, or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type cmd.
3 Press Enter, or click OK.
4 Type ipconfig, and then press Enter.

Note: Type ipconfig /all to see additional useful information.

5 Look for IP Address.

The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

For Macintosh users

Note: This is applicable only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or later.

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to: System Preferences > Network
2 Click Ethernet, Wi-Fi, or AirPort.
3 Click Advanced > TCP/IP.
4 Look for IPv4 Address.

Finding the IP address of the printer

Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.

You can find the printer IP address:

• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
  •From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.

Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Accessing the Embedded Web Server

The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.

1 Obtain the printer IP address:

•From the printer control panel home screen
- From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
- By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section

Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

3 Press Enter.

Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

Customizing the home screen

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Do one or more of the following:

•Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.

a Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.

Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.

c Click Submit.

- Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen applications” on page 20 or see the documentation that came with the application.

Understanding the different applications

Use To
Card Copy	Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up Card Copy” on page 21.
Fax	Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page 91.
Forms and Favorites	Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 20.
Multi Send	Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting up Multi Send” on page 22.
MyShortcut	Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using MyShortcut” on page 22.
Scan to E-mail	Scan a document, and then send it to an e-mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing” on page 84.
Scan to Computer	Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information, see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 117.
Scan to FTP	Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see “Scanning to an FTP address” on page 114.
Scan to Network	Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 23.

Activating the home screen applications

Finding information about the home screen applications

Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the Embedded Web Server, see "Accessing the Embedded Web Server" on page 19.

For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:

1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then click SELECT YOUR PRODUCT > ▶.

2 Do either of the following:

• Click Business Solutions, and then select the name of the application.
• Click Software and Solutions > Other Apps.

3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.

Setting up Forms and Favorites

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Use To

Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen.Note:The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least areadaccess. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.

3 Click Add, and then customize the settings.

Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
- To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see "Finding the IP address of the computer" on page 18.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.

4 Click Apply.

To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.

Setting up Card Copy

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Use To
	Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet-size cards.You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information on the card in a more convenient manner.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.

3 Change the default scanning options, if necessary.

• Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
• Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application is used.
• Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.
• Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).
• Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.

Notes:

• When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for black and white.
• When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and 300 dpi for black and white.
• Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.

4 Click Apply.

To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.

Using MyShortcut

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Use To
	Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or e-mail jobs.

To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Multi Send

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Use To
	Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3 From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.

Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
- If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 18.

4 Click Apply.

To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Scan to Network

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Use To

Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.

Notes:

• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.

Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 18.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.

4 Click Apply.

To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Remote Operator Panel

This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing at the network printer.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Submit.

To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.

Exporting and importing a configuration

You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:

a Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
b From the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
c Click Configure, and then do either of the following:

- To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file.

Notes:

• When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
• If a "JVM Out of Memory" error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved.

- To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.

Notes:

• Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
• If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.

3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:

a Click Settings > Import/Export.

b Do either of the following:

- To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file.

- To import a configuration file, do the following:

1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2 Click Submit.

Additional printer setup

Installing internal options

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

Available internal options

- Memory card

-DDR3 DIMM

- Flash memory

-Fonts

—Firmware

• Forms and Barcode
  •Prescribe
  •IPDS

Note: The printer hard disk is an optional memory device that can be attached to the rear USB port of the printer.

Accessing the controller board

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

1 Access the controller board at the back of the printer.

Note: This task requires a flat-head screwdriver.

2 Turn the screws counterclockwise to remove them.

Diagram of a printer internal structure with red arrows indicating flow or movement, no text or symbols present

3 Slightly open the controller board access cover, and then shift to the right to remove it.

Two views of an open electronic device showing internal components and a close-up of a green circuit board (no text or symbols visible)

4 Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

Interior view of a printer showing green circuit board and drive casing (no text or symbols visible)

1 Memory card connector

2 Option card connector

5 Reattach the cover.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure showing green circuit board and paper filter (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a printer's front panel showing internal components and a red arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols visible)

6 Turn the screws clockwise to lock the cover.

Diagram of a printer with internal components and red arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)

Installing a memory card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

1 Access the controller board.

For more information, see "Accessing the controller board" on page 27.

2 Unpack the memory card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may cause damage.

3 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.

Diagram of a heat exchanger or cooling device with two labeled components (1 and 2), showing internal structure and green panel layout (no text or symbols beyond labels)

4 Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until it clicks into place.

Diagram showing two red arrows labeled 1 and 2 pointing to a green panel-like structure, likely illustrating a process or transformation.

5 Close the controller board access cover.

Installing an optional card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Access the controller board.

For more information, see "Accessing the controller board" on page 27.

2 Unpack the optional card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.

Two 3D diagrams showing a device with labeled components, one with blue frame and green base, the other with a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.

3D illustration of a microchip with a green base and red arrow pointing to its component (no text or symbols)

Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the controller board.

Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.

5 Close the controller board access door.

Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 37.

Installing hardware options

Order of installation

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Install the printer and any optional tray in the following order:

• Optional 550-sheet tray (Tray 3)
• Optional 650-sheet duo tray with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)
• Printer

Installing an optional tray

The printer supports two optional input sources: a 550-sheet tray and a 650-sheet duo tray (Tray 2) with an integrated multipurpose feeder.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

1 Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material and the dust cover.

Diagram of a printer with a handle and spool, showing red arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols present)

2 Place the tray near the printer.

Note: If you are installing both the optional trays, then the optional 550-sheet tray must always be installed as the first tray when configuring from the bottom to the top.

3 Align the 650-sheet duo tray with the 550-sheet tray, and then lower it into place.

Two stacked printer units with a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols visible)

4 Align the printer with the 650-sheet duo tray, and then lower the printer into place.

Disassembled printer with paper feeding into a base case, showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a location (no text or symbols visible)

5 Install the dust covers.

3D diagram of a mechanical component with highlighted internal structure and red directional arrows indicating flow or force (no text or symbols)

Note: When the printer software and any options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see "Updating available options in the printer driver" on page 37.

Attaching cables

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.

Make sure to match the following:

•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

Labeled diagram of an open printer showing internal components and ports, with numbered annotations pointing to different parts.

	Use the To
1	Rear USB port	Attach an optional wireless network adapter or an optional printer hard disk.
2	Security lock port Lock the controller board.
3	Printer power cord socket	Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
4	LINE port	Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack (RJ-11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes.
5	EXT port	Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region.Note: Remove the plug to access the port.
6	USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer using a USB cable.
7	Ethernet port Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.

Setting up the printer software

Installing the printer software

Note: If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall the current software first.

For Windows users

1 Close all open software programs.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually:

a Click , or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

For Macintosh users

1 Close all open applications.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute, then click the CD icon on the desktop.

3 Double-click the software installer package, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Note: To take advantage of the full features of your printer, select the custom install option, and then select all packages listed.

Using the Internet

1 Go to the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
2 Navigate to:

SUPPORT & DOWNLOADS > select your printer > select your operating system

3 Download the printer driver, and then install the printer software.

Updating available options in the printer driver

When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for use.

For Windows users

1 Open the printers folder.

a Click 📄, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.

c Press Enter, or click OK.

2 Select the printer.

3 Right-click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7) or Properties (earlier versions).

4 Click the Configuration tab.

5 Do either of the following:

- Click Update Now - Ask Printer.

- Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.

6 Click Apply.

For Macintosh users

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:

- System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver

- System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver

2 Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.

Networking

Notes:

- Purchase a MarkNet ^TM N8352 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network. For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the instruction sheet that came with the adapter.

- A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X - RADIUS are types of security used on a network.

Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network

To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:

Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the printer.

• A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
  •The network gateway
  •The network mask
  •A nickname for the printer (optional)

Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.

You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a damaged cable.

Installing the printer on an Ethernet network

For Windows users

1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually:

a Click 📋, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of the CD or DVD drive.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

2 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
4 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.
5 Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.

Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.

6 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

For Macintosh users

1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Obtain the printer IP address either:

•From the printer control panel
- From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
- By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section

Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.

3 Install the printer driver on the computer.

a Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double-click the installer package for the printer.
b Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
c Select a destination, and then click Continue.
d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
e Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.
f Click Close when installation is complete.

4 Add the printer.

- For IP printing:

a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:

— System Preferences > Print & Scan

— System Preferences > Print & Fax

b Click+.

c Click the IP tab.

d Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.

•For AppleTalk printing:

Notes:

—Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
—This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.

a From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax

b Click +, and then navigate to:

AppleTalk > select your printer > Add

Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network

Notes:

• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.

Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:

• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.

Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select.

• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:

—WEP key

If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.

—WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase

WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network.

-802.1X-RADIUS

If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:

• Authentication type
• Inner authentication type
  •802.1X user name and password
  •Certificates

—No security

If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.

Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.

Notes:

- If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the

security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact your system support person.

- To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your system support person.

Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard

Before you begin, make sure that:

• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:

Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto >

Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup

2 Select a wireless connection setup.

Use To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections. Note: This menu shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID. Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi-Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup.

3 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup

Before you begin, make sure that:

• The access point (wireless router) is Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS-compatible. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
• A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

Using the Push Button Configuration method

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi-Fi Protected p > Start Push Button Method

2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi-Fi Protected p > Start PIN Method

2 Copy the eight-digit WPS PIN.
3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.

Notes:

• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.

5 Enter the eight-digit PIN, and then save the setting.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server

Before you begin, make sure that:

• Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).

Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and channel.

4 Click Submit.
5 Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x] section, see if the status is Connected.

Verifying printer setup

When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following:

• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly. Remove the option, and then install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer has networking support, then use this page to verify that the network connection is working. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

Printing a menu settings page

From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Menu Settings Page

Printing a network setup page

If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Network Setup Page

2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.

If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning. Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Loading paper and specialty media

This chapter covers the selection and handling of paper and specialty media. Proper selection and loading of media can improve how reliably documents print. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 239 and “Storing paper” on page 59.

Setting the paper size and type

From the home screen navigate to:

Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type :

Configuring Universal paper settings

The Universal paper size is a user-defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus.

Notes:

• The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and is loaded only in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder.
• The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches) and is loaded only in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure

2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.

3 Select the width or height, and then touch

Loading the 250- and 550-sheet tray

The printer has one 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) with an integrated manual feeder. The 250-sheet tray, the 650-sheet duo tray, and the 550-sheet tray support the same paper sizes and types and are loaded in the same way.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.

1 Pull out the tray completely.

Note: Do not remove trays while a job is printing or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with green plastic components, showing no text or symbols

2 If the paper is longer than letter-size paper, then squeeze and then slide the length guide at the back of the tray to extend it.

Diagram showing two labeled views of a device with green components, highlighting red arrows indicating features.

3 Squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.

Diagram showing a green plastic component being inserted into a device, with numbered annotations highlighting the process.

Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guide.

4 Squeeze, and then slide the width guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.

3D printer image showing internal components with arrows pointing to a green circuit board (no text or symbols)

Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.

5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Diagram illustrating three-step folding or retraction process with red arrows indicating direction of movement

6 Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.

3D illustration of a printer internal structure with a red downward arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols)

7 Place the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper.

8 Insert the tray.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with a red arrow pointing to it, no visible text or symbols.

9 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Note: Mixing paper sizes or paper types in a tray may cause jams.

Loading the manual feeder

The standard 250-sheet tray has an integrated manual feeder that can be used to print on different types of paper one sheet at a time.

1 Load a sheet of paper into the manual feeder:

-Printable side facedown for one-sided printing
- Printable side faceup for two-sided (duplex) printing

Note: There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on the mode of printing.

One-sided printing using a letterhead Two-sided printing using a letterhead ABC ABC

- Load envelope with the flap side up and against the right side of the paper guide.

Close-up of a printer emitting a paper envelope with red arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

2 Feed paper into the manual feeder only to the point where its leading edge can contact the paper guides.

Note: To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality media designed for laser printers.

3 Adjust the paper guides to the width of the paper loaded.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not force the paper into the feeder. Forcing the paper may cause jams.

Diagram showing a printer or printer with red arrows pointing to a paper sheet, no text or symbols present.

Loading the 650-sheet duo tray

The 650-sheet duo tray (Tray 2) consists of a 550-sheet tray and an integrated 100-sheet multipurpose feeder. The tray is loaded in the same way as the 250-sheet tray and the optional 550-sheet tray, and supports the same paper types and sizes. The only differences are the look of the guide tabs and the location of the paper size indicators.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.

3D cutaway view of a white electronic device showing internal components with labeled parts (1, 2, 3), no text or symbols present.

1 Length guide tab

2 Paper size indicator

3 Width guide tab

Loading the multipurpose feeder

1 Push the multipurpose feeder latch to the left.

Close-up of a printer's front panel with a magnified inset showing a red arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

2 Open the multipurpose feeder.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with a red arrow indicating the paper's edge (no text or symbols visible)

3 Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.

Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.

Close-up of a white printer with paper feed being inserted, showing paper layout and a red arrow indicating compression (no text or symbols)

4 Prepare the paper for loading.

- Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Diagram illustrating three-step folding or retraction process with arrows indicating direction of movement

- Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Note: Avoid touching the printable side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.

Three-step illustration showing hands holding a document and interacting with a card (no text or symbols present)

- Flex a stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

Three-step illustration showing hand positioning and lifting a piece of paper (no text or symbols)

5 Locate the maximum paper fill indicator and tab.

Note: Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the paper guides.

Diagram of a printer with numbered parts labeled 1 to 5, showing internal structure and paper feed path.

1 Width guide tab

2 Maximum paper fill indicator

3 Width guide

4 Feeder extender

5 Paper size indicator

6 Load the paper, and then adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack.

- Load paper, card stock, and transparencies with the recommended printable side facedown and the top edge entering the printer first.

Close-up of a printer's paper being inserted into a paper holder, with a red arrow indicating the paper's direction (no text or symbols visible)

- Load envelopes with the flap side up and against the right side of the paper guide.

Diagram of a printer with an envelope being inserted, showing paper movement and red arrows indicating process (no text or symbols present)

Notes:

• Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
• Load only one size and type of paper at a time.
• Paper should lie flat in the multipurpose feeder. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder and is not bent or wrinkled.

7 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Linking and unlinking trays

When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer links those trays. When one linked tray becomes empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. We recommend giving all unique paper, such as letterhead and different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in do not automatically link.

Linking and unlinking trays

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.

3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.

• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.

4 Click Submit.

Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information, see "Setting the paper size and type" on page 44.

Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured.

Creating a custom name for a paper type

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.

3 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.

4 Click Submit.

5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Custom Names

2 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.

3 Touch

4 Touch Custom Types, and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Assigning a custom paper type

Using the Embedded Web Server

Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.

3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type

Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user-defined custom names.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type

Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user-defined custom names.

3 Touch

Configuring a custom name

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.

3 Select a custom name you want to configure, then select a paper or specialty media type, and then click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom name you want to configure, and then touch √.

Paper and specialty media guide

Using specialty media

Tips on using letterhead

• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
• Print a test page on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Before loading letterhead, flex, fan, and straighten the stacks to prevent sheets from sticking together.
  •Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.

Source	Printing	Printable side	Paper orientation
Trays	One-sided Faceup Load the sheet		with the top edge entering the printer first.
Trays	Two-sided Facedown Load the sheet		with the bottom edge entering the printer first.
Manual feeder	One-sided Facedown Load the sheet		with the top edge entering the printer first.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether or not the preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers.
Manual feeder	Two-sided Faceup Load the sheet	with the bottom edge entering the printer first.
Multipurpose feeder	One-sided Facedown Load the sheet	with the top edge entering the printer first.
Multipurpose feeder	Two-sided Faceup Load the sheet	with the bottom edge entering the printer first.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether or not the preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers.

Tips on using transparencies

Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.

• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the transparencies loaded in the tray.
• Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Feed transparencies from the 250-sheet tray, manual feeder, or multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
• Before loading transparencies, flex, fan, and straighten the stacks to prevent sheets from sticking together.

Tips on using envelopes

• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the envelopes loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.

- Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.

- For best performance, use envelopes made from 90-g / m^2 (24-lb) paper or 25% cotton.

- Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.

- To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:

—Have excessive curl or twist.
—Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
—Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
—Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
—Have an interlocking design.
—Have postage stamps attached.
—Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
—Have bent corners.
—Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.

- Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.

- Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex and fan the envelopes to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using labels

• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at http://support.lexmark.com.

- Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.

- Do not use labels with slick backing material.

- Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge warranties.

- Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.

- Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Tips on using card stock

Card stock is heavy, single-ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness, and texture, can significantly affect print quality.

• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the card stock loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed problems.
• Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Paper guidelines

Select the correct paper or specialty media to reduce printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.

Paper characteristics

The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock.

Weight

The printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 176-g/m^2 (47-lb) bond grain long paper. The multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 176-g/m^2 (47-lb) bond grain long paper. Paper lighter than 60 g/m^2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75-g/m^2 (20-lb) bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182×257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches), we recommend 90 g/m^2 (24 lb) or heavier paper.

Note: Duplex printing is supported from 60–105-g/m ^2 (16–28-lb) bond grain long paper.

Curl

Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.

Smoothness

Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture content

The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly. Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.

Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Grain direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.

For 60–90-g/m ^2 (16–24-lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended.

Fiber content

Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

Unacceptable paper

The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:

• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
  •Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
  In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.

•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers

- Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers

•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)

•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m ^2 (16 lb)

• Multiple-part forms or documents

Selecting paper

Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.

To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:

•Always use new, undamaged paper.
- Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
- Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead

Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:

• Use grain long for 60–90-g/m ^2 (16–24-lb) paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.

When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.

Using recycled paper and other office papers

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.

Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply to recycled paper.

•Low moisture content (4–5%)
- Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)

Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.

• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed

Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m ^2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing conditions).

Storing paper

Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21^ C ( 70^ F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24^ C ( 65–75^ F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent.

• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.

• Store individual packages on a flat surface.

• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
  • Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights

This chapter provides information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support.

Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.

Supported paper sizes

Note: Your printer model may have a 650-sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550-sheet tray and an integrated 100-sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550-sheet tray of the 650-sheet duo tray supports the same paper sizes as the optional 550-sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and weights.

Paper size and dimension	Standard 250-sheet tray	Manual feeder	650-sheet duo tray		550-sheet tray	ADF Scanner glass	Duplex mode
			550-sheet tray	Multipurpose feeder
A4210 x 297 mm(8.3 x 11.7 in.)	^1111	√	√	√	√	√	√
A5148 x 210 mm(5.83 x 8.3 in.)	^1212	√	√	√	√	√	X
A6105 x 148 mm(4.1 x 5.8 in.)	X	√	X	^1	X	X	X
JIS B5182 x 257 mm(7.2 x 10.1 in.)	^1111	√	√	√	√	√	X
Letter216 x 279 mm(8.5 x 11 in.)	^1111	√	√	√	√	√	√
Legal216 x 356 mm(8.5 x 14 in.)	^1111	√	√	√	√	√	X
^1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing. ^2 Universal is supported in the standard 250- and optional 550-sheet trays only if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9 mm (5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.). ^3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.). ^4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).

Paper size and dimension	Standard 250-sheet tray	Manual feeder	650-sheet duo tray		550-sheet tray	ADF Scanner glass		Duplex mode
			550-sheet tray	Multipurpose feeder
Executive184 x 267 mm(7.3 x 10.5 in.)	^1111	√	√	√	√	√	√	X
Oficio (Mexico)216 x 340 mm(8.5 x 13.4 in.)	^1111	√	√	√	√	√	X	√
Folio216 x 330 mm(8.5 x 13 in.)	^1111	√	√	√	√	√	X	√
Statement140 x 216 mm(5.5 x 8.5 in.)	X	√	X	^1	X	√	√	X
Universal76 x 127 mm(3 x 5 in.) to216 x 356 mm(8.5 x 14 in.)	X	^1,3	X	^1,3	X	√	√	X
Universal148 x 210 mm(5.8 x 8.3 in) to216 x 356 mm(8.5 x 14 in).	^1,2 1,2 1,2	√	√	√	√	X	X	^4
7 3/4 Envelope(Monarch)98 x 191 mm(3.9 x 7.5 in.)	X	√	X	^1	X	X	X	X
9 Envelope98 x 225 mm(3.9 x 8.9 in.)	X	√	X	^1	X	X	X	X
10 Envelope105 x 241 mm(4.1 x 9.5 in.)	X	√	X	^1	X	X	X	X

^1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.

^2 Universal is supported in the standard 250- and optional 550-sheet trays only if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9 mm (5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).

^3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.).

^4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).

Paper size and dimension	Standard 250-sheet tray	Manual feeder	650-sheet duo tray		550-sheet tray	ADF Scanner glass	Duplex mode
			550-sheet tray	Multipurpose feeder
DL Envelope110 x 220 mm(4.3 x 8.7 in.)	X	√	X	^1	X	X	X	X
C5 Envelope162 x 229 mm(6.4 x 9 in.)	X	√	X	^1	X	X	X	X
B5 Envelope176 x 250 mm(6.9 x 9.8 in.)	X	√	X	^1	X	X	X	X
Other Envelope98 x 162 mm(3.9 x 6.3 in.) up to176 x 250 mm(6.9 x 9.8 in.)	X	√	X	^1	X	X	X	X
^1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing. ^2 Universal is supported in the standard 250- and optional 550-sheet trays only if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9 mm (5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.). ^3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.). ^4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).

Supported paper types and weights

Notes:

• Your printer model may have a 650-sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550-sheet tray and an integrated 100-sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550-sheet tray of the 650-sheet duo tray supports the same paper as the 550-sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and weights.
• Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.

Paper type 250-sheet tray		Manual feeder	650-sheet duo tray		550-sheet tray	ADF Scanner glass		Duplex mode
			550-sheet tray	Multipurpose feeder
Paper•Plain•Recycled•Glossy•Bond•Letterhead•Preprinted•Colored•Light•Heavy•Rough/Cotton•Custom Type [x]	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓
Card stock X	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓
Transparencies	✓	✓	XXX	✓		✓	✓
Labels•Paper	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	X
Envelope X		✓	XXX	✓		✓	✓

Printing

Printing forms

Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 20.

1 From the printer home screen, navigate to:

Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings

2 Depending on your printer model, touch 📄, √, or Submit.

Printing a document

Printing a document

1 From the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:

For Windows users

a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.

For Macintosh users

a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:

1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3 Click OK.

b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:

1 With a document open, choose File > Print. If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options pop-up menus, adjust the settings, if necessary.

Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.

3 Click Print.

Printing in black and white

From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only >

Adjusting toner darkness

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

- View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123. - If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.

3 Adjust the setting, and then click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness

2 Adjust the setting, and then touch

Using Max Speed and Max Yield

Max Speed and Max Yield let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield is the factory default setting.

• Max Speed—This lets you print in either black or color depending on what is set in the printer driver. The printer prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the printer driver.
• Max Yield—This lets you switch from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color mode switching can result to slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu.

3 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu

2 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.

3 Touch Submit.

Printing from a flash drive

Printing from a flash drive

Notes:

- Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control panel.

- You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.

1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

Illustration of a printer with a red arrow pointing to the tip of the cover (no text or symbols present)

Notes:

• A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the printer ignores the flash drive.

- If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the printer display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. Loss of data can occur.

Safety warning sign showing no tool and hammer, with a magnified view of a mechanical component below.

2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.

3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.

4 Use + or - to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.

Notes:

- Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.

- If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive.

Supported flash drives and file types

Notes:

• High-speed USB flash drives must support the full-speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.

- USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.

Recommended flash drives File type
Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)	Documents:pdfxpsImages:dcxgifjpeg or .jpgbmppcx.tiff or .tif.pngfls

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Storing print jobs in the printer

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Security > Confidential Print > select a print job type

Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times	an invalid PIN can be entered. Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs	in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel. Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the numbers 0–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It lets you examine if the first copy is satisfactory or not. The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time. Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel.All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.

2 Touch

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.

For Windows users

1 With a document open, click File > Print.

2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

3 Click Print and Hold.

4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four-digit PIN.

5 Click OK or Print.

6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.

- For confidential print jobs, navigate to: Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

- For other print jobs, navigate to: Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

For Macintosh users

1 With a document open, choose File > Print.

If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.

3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four-digit PIN.

4 Click OK or Print.

5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.

- For confidential print jobs, navigate to: Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

- For other print jobs, navigate to: Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

Modifying confidential print settings

Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

- View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

- If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.

3 Modify the settings:

• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.

4 Save the modified settings.

Printing information pages

Printing a font sample list

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

Printing a directory list

A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.

From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Print Directory

Canceling a print job

Canceling a print job from the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs, or press ✗ on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch 📄.
3 Press on the keypad to return to the home screen.

Canceling a print job from the computer

For Windows users

1 Open the printers folder.

a Click 📄, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

2 Double-click the printer icon.
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.
4 Click Delete.

For Macintosh users

1 From the Apple Menu, navigate to either of the following:

• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select a printer > Open Print Queue
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select a printer > Open Print Queue

2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then click Delete.

Copying

ADF Scanner glass

Exterior view of a printer with paper and a red arrow indicating a document (no readable text or symbols)

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.

Open image of a printer with a paperclip inserted into the cover (no visible text or symbols)

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Making copies

Making a quick copy

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
  •The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are the same.

3 From the printer control panel, press

Copying using the ADF

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.

Notes:

- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It

Copying using the scanner glass

1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It

If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next page.

3 Touch Finish the Job.

Copying photos

1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Content > Photo > √

3 From the Content Source menu, select the appropriate setting that best matches the original photo.
4 Touch > Copy It

Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next page.

5 Touch Finish the Job.

Copying on specialty media

Copying on transparencies

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document

3 Navigate to:

Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It

If there are no trays that support transparencies, then navigate to:

Manual Feeder > select the size of the transparencies > Transparency

4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.

Copying on letterhead

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document

3 Touch Copy to > Manual Feeder.

4 Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder.

5 Select the size of the letterhead, and then touch Letterhead > Copy It.

Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, touch Copy.
2 Adjust the copy settings, and then touch Save As Shortcut.
Note: If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch √.

4 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.

If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

Notes:

• The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings.

Customizing copy settings

Copying to a different size

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document

4 Navigate to:

Copy to > select a new size for the copy > Copy It

Note: If the selected paper size is different from the "Copy from" size, then the printer scales the size automatically.

Making copies using paper from a selected tray

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document

4 Touch Copy to, and then select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.

5 Touch Copy It.

Copying different paper sizes

Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the "Copy to" and "Copy from" settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper size (Example 2).

Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > Copy to > Auto Size Match > Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.

Example 2: Copying on a single paper size

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
  •The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > Copy to > Letter > Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected.

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method

Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select "2 sided to 2 sided" if you have two-sided original documents and you want two-sided copies.

4 Touch √ > Copy It.

Reducing or enlarging copies

Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Scale area, touch + or - to enlarge or reduce your copies.

Notes:

•The factory default setting for Scale is Auto.
- If you leave Scale set to Auto, then the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
- Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.

5 Touch Copy It.

Adjusting copy quality

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Content

4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.

• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business-type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

5 Touch

6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.

• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
- Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
- Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
- Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
- Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.

•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.

- Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

7 Touch √ > Copy It.

Collating copies

If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the copies as groups of pages (not collated).

Collated Not collated

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
  •The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages > √ > Copy It

Placing separator sheets between copies

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
  •The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Separator Sheets

Note: Set Collate to "1,2,3 - 1,2,3" to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to "1,1,1 - 2,2,2," then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see "Collating copies" on page 78.

4 Select one of the following:

- Between Copies

- Between Jobs

- Between Pages

•Off

5 Touch √ > Copy It.

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet

In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto a single sheet of paper.

Notes:

• Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
  •Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Paper Saver > select the output you want > √ > Copy It

Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.

Placing information on copies

Placing a header or footer on pages

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Header/Footer

4 Select Header or Footer, and then touch √.
5 Select where you want to insert the header or footer, then select a text option, and then touch √.

6 Select where you want to print the header or footer, and then touch √.
7 From the Header/Footer menu, touch √ > Copy It.

Placing an overlay message on each page

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
  •The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Overlay > select an overlay message > √.

Note: The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, and Draft.

4 Touch Copy It.

Canceling a copy job

Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF

When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.

Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass

From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.

Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.

Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed

1 From the printer control panel, press

2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch

3 Press to return to the home screen.

Understanding the copy options

Copy from

This option lets you select the paper size of the original document.

• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.

Copy to

This option lets you select the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.

• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the settings for "Copy from" and "Copy to" are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference.
• If the type or size of paper you want to use is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder, and manually load the paper in the manual feeder or multipurpose feeder.
• When "Copy to" is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a tray, manual feeder, or multipurpose feeder.

Scale

This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic scaling.

• When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal-size to letter-size paper, set the "Copy from" and "Copy to" paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
• To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch - or + on the printer control panel. To make a continuous decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.

Sides (Duplex)

This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.

Collate

This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.

Copies

This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.

Content

This option lets you set the original document type and source.

Select from the following content types:

• Graphics—The original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.

Select from the following content sources:

• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
  • Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.

Color

This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.

Advanced Duplex

This option lets you specify the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and how documents are bound.

Save As Shortcut

This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name.

Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.

Margin Shift

This option lets you increase or reduce the size of the margin of a page by shifting the scanned image. Touch + or - to set the margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.

Edge Erase

This option lets you remove smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

Overlay

This option lets you create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose from Confidential, Copy, Draft, Urgent, and Custom. You can type a custom message in the "Enter the Custom Text Overlay and press OK" field. The message will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.

Cover Page Setup

This option lets you set up the cover page of copies and booklets.

Separator Sheets

This option lets you place a blank sheet of paper between copies, prints, pages, print jobs or copy jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.

Header/Footer

This option lets you insert a header or footer and specify its location on a page.

Select one of the following:

•Bates number
- Custom text
- Date/Time
•Page number

Paper Saver

This option lets you print two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also called N-up printing where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page.

Advanced Imaging

This option lets you adjust the Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you copy the document.

Create Booklet

This option lets you create a sequence of printed and collated pages that, when folded, forms a booklet half the page size of the original document and with all the pages in order. You can choose between one-sided and two-sided.

Note: This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

Custom Job

This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

E-mailing

ADF Scanner glass

Exterior view of a printer with paper and a red arrow indicating a document (no readable text or symbols)

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.

Open image of a printer with a paperclip inserted into the cover (no visible text or symbols)

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

You can use the printer to e-mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e-mail from the printer. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.

Setting up the printer to e-mail

Setting up the e-mail function

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.

3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.

Creating an e-mail shortcut

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings.

3 From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the e-mail recipient, and then type the e-mail address. If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma.
5 Click Add.

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the recipient's e-mail address >

Note: To create a group of recipients, touch ↩, and then type the next recipient's e-mail address.

2 Touch Subject > type the e-mail subject > √.
3 Touch Message > type your message > √.
4 Adjust the e-mail settings.

Note: If you change the settings after the e-mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.

5 Touch Save As Shortcut.
6 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch √.
7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.

If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

Notes:

• The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when e-mailing another document using the same settings.

E-mailing a document

Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s)

4 Type the e-mail address, or press # and then enter the shortcut number.

To enter additional recipients, touch ←, and then enter the e-mail address or shortcut number that you want to add.

Note: You can also enter an e-mail address using the address book.

5 Touch √ > E-mail lt.

Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch √.

To enter additional recipients, touch ←, and then enter the e-mail address or shortcut number that you want to add.

4 Touch √ > E-mail It.

Sending an e-mail using the address book

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s) > 📋 > type the name of the recipient > √

4 Touch the name of the recipient.

To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next recipient.

5 Touch √ > E-mail It.

Customizing e-mail settings

Adding e-mail subject and message information

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e-mail address >

4 Touch Subject > type the e-mail subject > √.

5 Touch Message > type your message > √.

Changing the output file type

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e-mail address > √ > Send as

4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.

• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.

• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs.

• XPS—Use this to create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third-party standalone viewer.

5 Touch √ > E-mail It.

Note: If you selected Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.

Canceling an e-mail

• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page / Finish the Job appears.

Understanding the e-mail options

Recipient(s)

This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e-mail addresses.

Subject

This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.

Message

This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.

File Name

This option lets you customize the attachment file name.

Save As Shortcut

This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.

Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.

Original Size

This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e-mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter- and legal-size pages).

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution

This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Color

This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.

Send As

This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.

Select one of the following:

- PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages.

Note: PDF is the factory default setting.

• Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
• XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Content

This option lets you set the original document type and source.

Select from the following content types:

• Graphics—The original document is mostly business-type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.

Select from the following content sources:

• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
  • Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.

Page Setup

This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper. This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.

Custom Job

This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Scan Preview

This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Transmission Log

This option lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.

Edge Erase

This option lets you remove smudges or any mark around the edges of a document. You can remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or you can pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

Advanced Imaging

This option lets you adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you e-mail the document.

Faxing

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Exterior view of a printer with paper and paper roll (no visible text or symbols)

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.

3D rendering of an open printer with a red paperclip inserted (no visible text or symbols)

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Setting up the printer to fax

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

Note: The following connection methods are applicable only in select countries or regions.

During the initial printer setup, clear the Fax function and any other function you plan to set up later, and then press Continue.

Note: The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.

Photo of a printer with a prohibition symbol indicating no file or tool, showing a device with a grid and ventilation panel.

Initial fax setup

Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other entity, or individual). For more information, see “Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment” on page 326.

To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu.

Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information.

Using the printer control panel for fax setup

When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start-up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.

1 When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:

a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
b Enter the fax name, and then touch Submit.

2 When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.

Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.

3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.

4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.

5 Click Submit.

Choosing a fax connection

Scenario 1: Standard telephone line

Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line

Diagram showing printer connection to a device with cable routing and a line diagram illustrating the connection path.

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

Tips for this setup:

- You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).

- If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings that you want.

Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine

Connected to the same telephone wall jack

Diagram illustrating the connection between a printer, telephone devices, and a file folder with labeled ports (EXT, LINE) and cable routing.

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the answering machine to the 📞 port of the printer.

Connected to different wall jacks

Diagram illustrating the connection between a printer, telephone, and connected devices with labeled wiring and connection points.

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

Tips for this setup:

• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On).
• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and takes over the call.
• If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically.

Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service

Diagram illustrating the connection between a printer, telephone, and connected devices with annotations for phone call, email, and line access.

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the telephone to the part of the printer.

Tips for this setup:

• This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically.
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually (Auto Answer Off).

When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone to receive the fax.

- You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.

Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)

Diagram illustrating network connection between a printer, server, and connected devices with labeled ports and connections

A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.

To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.

To install a filter for the printer:

1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer. Connect the other end to the phone port on the DSL filter.
3 To continue using a computer for Internet access, connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter.
4 To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the 📋 port of the printer, and then connect the telephone to the port.

Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service

Diagram illustrating network connection and port layout with labeled components including printer, server, phone, and router connections.

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.

Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port.

3 Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.

Tips for this setup:

• To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two phone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer into the second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.

Note: Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider

Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem

Diagram illustrating network connection between a printer, server, and device with labeled ports and cable connections

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.

Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port.

3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the 📞 port of the printer.

Notes:

• To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line 1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.

- Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility

Diagram illustrating the connection between a printer and a file folder, showing cable routing and port connections with labels like EXT, LINE, and a magnified detail view.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the 📞 port of the printer.

Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs

Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.

If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.

There may be an adapter plug installed in the port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer.

Line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

Part name Part number
Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519

Connecting the printer to a non-RJ-11 wall jack

Diagram illustrating the connection between a printer, cable, and connected devices with labeled ports and wiring.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.

3 If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device has a non-RJ-11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.

Notes:

- The 📋 port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from the 📋 port of the printer.

- In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.

Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany

The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The F port is for telephones.

N F N

Connect the printer to any of the N ports.

Diagram showing connection between printer, network device, and computer interface with labeled wiring and connection points

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ-11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.

3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as shown.

Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the 📞 port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.

Connecting to a distinctive ring service

A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port ☐.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

Close-up of a computer interface with a cable and socket connected to a power outlet (no text or symbols visible)

3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.

Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and triple ring patterns.

a From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On

b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch

Setting the outgoing fax name and number

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.

3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.

4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.

5 Click Submit.

Setting the date and time

You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.

3 In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.

4 Click Submit.

Note: It is recommended to use the network time.

Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time

The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.

3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time Zone Setup section.

4 Click Submit.

Sending a fax

Sending a fax using the printer control panel

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, touch Fax.

4 From the printer control panel keypad, enter the fax number or the shortcut number.

Note: To add recipients, touch ↩, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or search the address book.

5 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the computer

The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.

1 With a document open, click File > Print.

2 Select the printer, and then navigate to:

Properties > Fax tab > Enable fax

3 Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the "Fax number(s)" field.

Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature

4 If necessary, enter a prefix in the "Dialing prefix" field.

5 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.

6 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the appropriate information.

7 Click OK.

Notes:

- The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.

- The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it can be used.

- If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.

Sending a fax using a shortcut number

Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. A shortcut number (1–99999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the address book

The address book feature lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers.

Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > type the name of the recipient >

Note: You can only search for one name at a time.

4 Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.

Sending a fax at a scheduled time

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > enter the fax number > Delayed Send

Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the fax queue.

4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch √.

The time is increased or decreased in 30-minute increments.

5 Touch Fax It.

Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.

Creating shortcuts

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support person.

3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.

Notes:

• To create a multiple-number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).

4 Assign a shortcut number.

Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.

To create a group of fax numbers, touch ←, and then enter the other fax number.

2 Touch

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch √.

4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

Customizing fax settings

Changing the fax resolution

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
4 From the Resolution area, touch - or + to change to the resolution you want.

Note: Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).

5 Touch Fax It.

Making a fax lighter or darker

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
4 From the Darkness area, touch - or + to adjust the darkness setting of the fax.
5 Touch Fax It.

Viewing a fax log

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Reports.

3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Blocking junk faxes

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

- View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

- If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.

Notes:

• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want to block.

Canceling an outgoing fax

Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning

• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.

Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory

1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.

The Cancel Jobs screen appears.

2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.

Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the job you want to cancel.

3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.

The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.

Holding and forwarding faxes

Holding faxes

This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.

3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:

•Off
•Always On
•Manual
•Scheduled

4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:

a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.

5 Click Add.

Forwarding a fax

This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e-mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4 From the "Forward to" menu, select Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5 In the "Forward to Shortcut" field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.

Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the "Forward to" menu.

6 Click Submit.

Understanding the fax options

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.

Resolution

This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Select one of the following:

• Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
• Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
• Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
• Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.

Color

This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.

Content

This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.

Select from the following content types:

• Graphics—The original document is mostly business-type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.

Select from the following content sources:

• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
  • Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.

Page Setup

This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.

Transmission Log

This option lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.

Edge Erase

This option lets you remove smudges or any mark around the edges of a document. You can remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or you can pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

Custom Job

This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Scan Preview

This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Delayed Send

This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.

Advanced Imaging

This option lets you change or adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you fax the document.

Scanning

Using Scan to Network

Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more information, see "Setting up Scan to Network" on page 23.

Scanning to an FTP address

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.	Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time.

When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer.

Creating shortcuts

Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server or using the printer control panel.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Navigate to:

Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup

3 Enter the appropriate information.

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support person.

4 Enter a shortcut number.

Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

FTP > FTP Address > type the FTP address > √> ▶type a name for the shortcut >

2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.

If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information. If you enter a number that is already in use, then you will be prompted to select another number.

Scanning to an FTP address

Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

FTP > FTP Address > type the FTP address > √ > Scan It

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
  •The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.

4 Touch Scan It.

Scanning to a computer or flash drive

ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.	Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive images when scanning to a computer. You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.

Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Scan Profile > Create.

3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.

5 Type a scan name.

Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.

6 Click Submit.

Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents.

7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.

a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
  •The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

c Do either of the following:

• Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
  Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.
  •From the home screen, navigate to:
  Held Jobs > Profiles > locate your shortcut on the list.

8 View the file from the computer.

Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.

Setting up Scan to Computer

Notes:

• This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
• Make sure that your computer and printer are connected to the same network.

1 Open the printers folder.

a Click

b In the Start Search dialog, type Run.
c In the Run dialog, type control printers.
d Press Enter, or click OK.

2 Depending on your operating system, click Add a device or Add a printer.

3 Select your printer from the list.

Note: To identify your printer, print a network setup page, and then look for "Fully Qualified Domain Name" in the TCP/IP section.

4 Click Next > Close.
5 From the printers folder, right-click the printer, and then click Scan Properties or Properties to configure the scan settings.

6 From the printer control panel, touch Scan to Computer > Options.

7 Select from the following options:

• Scan—Scan and save the document directly to a selected location on the computer.
• Scan for Print—Scan and automatically print the document.
• Scan for E-mail—Attach a scanned document to an e-mail.
• Scan for Fax—Attach a scanned document to be sent through fax.

8 Touch Send It.

Remote scan in progress appears on the printer display. The scanned image opens automatically on the computer screen.

Scanning to a flash drive

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.

Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.

4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.

Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.

5 Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.

Understanding the scan options

FTP Address

This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.

Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

File Name

This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.

Save As Shortcut

This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.

Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.

Original Size

This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter- and legal-size pages).

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution

This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Color

This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.

Send As

This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.

Select one of the following:

• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages.
• Secure PDF—Use to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
• XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Content

This option lets you set the original document type and source.

Select from the following content types:

• Graphics—The original document is mostly business-type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.

Select from the following content sources:

• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
  • Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
  •Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.

• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.

• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.

Page Setup

This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.

Transmission Log

This option lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.

Scan Preview

This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.

Edge Erase

This option lets you remove smudges or any mark around the edges of a document. You can remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or you can pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

Advanced Imaging

This option lets you adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you scan the document.

Custom Job

This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Understanding printer menus

Menus list

Supplies Menu Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports

Cyan Cartridge	Default Source	Menu Settings Page	Active NIC
Magenta Cartridge	Paper Size/Type	Device Statistics	Standard Network or Network [x]
Yellow Cartridge	Substitute Size	Network Setup Page
Black Cartridge	Paper Texture	Network [x] Setup Page	Standard USB
Waste Toner Bottle	Paper Weight	Shortcut List	SMTP Setup
Maintenance Kit	Paper Loading	Fax Job Log
	Custom Types	Fax Call Log
	Custom Names	Copy Shortcuts
	Custom Scan Sizes	E-mail Shortcuts
	Universal Setup	Fax Shortcuts
		FTP Shortcuts
		Profiles List
		Print Fonts
		Print Directory
		Print Demo
		Asset Report

Security Settings Help Manage Shortcuts Option Card Menu

Miscellaneous	General Settings	Print All Guides	Fax Shortcuts	[index of each installed DLE]
Security Settings	Copy Settings	Copy Guide	E-mail Shortcuts
Confidential Print	Fax Settings	E-mail Guide	FTP Shortcuts
Disk Wiping	E-mail Settings	Fax Guide	Copy Shortcuts
Security Audit Log	FTP Settings	FTP Guide	Profile Shortcuts
Set Date and Time	Flash Drive Menu	Color Quality
	Print Settings	Print Defects Guide
		Information Guide
		Supplies Guide

Supplies menu

Use To
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, or Black Toner CartridgeNearly LowLowVery LowReplaceMissingDefectiveMissing or UnresponsiveUnsupportedInvalid RegionOKNon-genuine Lexmark Cartridge	Show the status of the cyan, magenta, yellow, or black toner cartridge.
Black or Color Imaging KitNearly LowLowVery LowReplaceMissingDefectiveMissing or UnresponsiveUnsupportedOKNon-genuine Lexmark Imaging Kit	Show the status of the black or color imaging kit.
Waste Toner BottleNear FullReplaceMissingOK	Show the status of the waste toner bottle.
Maintenance KitNearly LowLowVery LowReplaceOK	Show the status of the maintenance kit.

Paper menu

Default Source menu

Use To

Default SourceTray [x]MP FeederManual PaperManual Envelope

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.Notes:The 650-sheet duo tray must be installed in order for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting in the Paper menu.Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.Only installed paper sources will appear as menu settings.If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

Paper Size/Type menu

Use To
Tray [x] SizeA4A5JIS-B5LetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioUniversal	Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.Notes:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Tray [x] TypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledLabelsGlossyBondLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/CottonCustom Type [x]	Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.Notes:Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting for all other trays.If available, a user-defined name appears instead of Custom Type [x].Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.Transparency is supported only in the 250-sheet tray.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
MP Feeder SizeA4A5A6JIS B5LetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioStatementUniversal7 3/4 Envelope9 Envelope10 EnvelopeDL EnvelopeC5 EnvelopeB5 EnvelopeOther Envelope	Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.Notes:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.The menu item applies only when the multipurpose feeder (MP Feeder) is installed.The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The paper size value must be set.
MP Feeder TypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledGlossyLabelsBondEnvelopeLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/CottonCustom Type [x]	Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.Note: Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Manual Paper SizeA4A5A6JIS B5LetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioStatementUniversal	Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.Note:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Manual Paper TypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledGlossyLabelsBondLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/CottonCustom Type [x]	Specify the paper type being manually loaded.Note:Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Size7 3/4 Envelope9 Envelope10 EnvelopeDL EnvelopeC5 EnvelopeB5 EnvelopeOther Envelope	Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.Note:10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope TypeEnvelopeCustom Type [x]	Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.Note:Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note:Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Substitute Size menu

Use To
Substitute SizeOffStatement/A5Letter/A4All Listed	Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.Notes:All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are allowed.Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change Paper appearing.

Paper Texture menu

Use To
Plain TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.Notes:•Normal is the factory default setting.•The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Glossy TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Glossy TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the heavy glossy paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Envelope TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton TextureRough	Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.
Custom [x] TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.Notes:Normal is the factory default setting.The options appear only if custom type is supported.

Paper Weight menu

Use To
Plain WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Glossy WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Glossy WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the heavy glossy paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.Note: Heavy is the factory default setting.
Letterhead WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light WeightLight	Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light.
Heavy WeightHeavy	Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Rough/Cotton WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the rough or cotton paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.Notes:Normal is the factory default setting.The options appear only when the custom type is supported.

Paper Loading menu

Use To
Cardstock LoadingOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Cardstock as the paper type.
Recycled LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Recycled as the paper type.
Glossy LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Glossy as the paper type.
Notes:Duplex sets the printer default to two-sided printing for every print job unless one-sided printing is selected from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Heavy Glossy LoadingOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Heavy Glossy as the paper type.
Labels LoadingOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Labels as the paper type.
Bond LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Bond as the paper type.
Letterhead LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper type.
Preprinted LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Colored as the paper type.
Light LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Light as the paper type.
Heavy LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Heavy as the paper type.
Rough/Cotton LoadingOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Rough/Cotton as the paper type.
Custom [x] LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Custom [x] as the paper type.Note:Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom type is supported.
Notes: Duplex sets the printer default to two-sided printing for every print job unless one-sided printing is selected from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.

Custom Types menu

Use To
Custom Type [x]PaperCard StockTransparencyGlossyRough/CottonLabelsEnvelope	Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Type [x] name or a user-defined custom name created in the Embedded Web Server or MarkVisionTM Professional.Notes:•Paper is the factory default setting for Custom Type [x].•The custom media type must be supported in the selected tray or feeder in order to print from that source.
RecycledPaperCard StockTransparencyGlossyRough/CottonLabelsEnvelope	Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected.Notes:•Paper is the factory default setting.•The Recycled paper type must be supported in the selected tray or feeder in order to print from that source.

Custom Names menu

Use To
Custom Name [x]	Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in the printer menus.

Custom Scan Sizes menu

Use To

Custom Scan Size [x]Scan Size NameWidth1–8.5 inches (25–215.9 mm)Height1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)OrientationPortraitLandscape2 scans per sideOffOn

Specify a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options.Notes:The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is the international factory default setting.14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is the international factory default setting.Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”

Universal Setup menu

Use To
Units of MeasureInchesMillimeters	Specify the unit of measure.Note:Inches is the U.S. factory default setting. Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width3-8.5 inches76-215.9 mm	Set the width for portrait orientation.Notes:If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum width allowed.8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the width in 0.01-inch increments.215.9 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase the width in 1-mm increments.
Portrait Height3-14.17 inches76-360 mm	Set the height for portrait orientation.Notes:If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum height allowed.14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the height in 0.01-inch increments.356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase the height in 1-mm increments.

Reports menu

Reports menu

Use To
Menu Settings Page	Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other information.
Device Statistics	Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages.
Network Setup Page	Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page	Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.Note: This menu item appears only when there is more than one network option installed and only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu.
Fax Call Log	Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked calls.Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu.
Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E-mail Shortcuts	Print a report containing information about e-mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts	Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer.
Print Directory	Print a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or in printer hard disk.Notes:Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed correctly and working.
Asset Report	Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database.

Network/Ports

Active NIC menu

Use	To
Active NICAuto[list of available network cards]	Allow the printer to connect to a network.Notes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.

Standard Network or Network [x] menus

Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.

Use To
PCL SmartSwitchOnOff	Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.Notes:On is the factory default setting.When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitchOnOff	Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.Notes:On is the factory default setting.When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA ModeOffAuto	Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.Notes:Auto is the factory default setting.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network BufferAuto3KB to [maximum size allowed]	Set the size of the network input buffer.Notes:Auto is the factory default setting.The value can be changed in 1-KB increments.The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job BufferingOffOnAuto	Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only appears when a formatted disk is installed.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from another input port.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PSOnOffAuto	Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.Notes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup OR Network [x] SetupReportsNetwork CardTCP/IPIPv6WirelessAppleTalk	Display and set the printer network settings.Note:The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.

Reports menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports

Use To
Print Setup Page	Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.

Network Card menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card

Use To
View Card StatusConnectedDisconnected	View the connection status of the network card.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active network card.
Network AddressUAA LAA	View the network addresses.
Job Timeout0, 10–225 seconds	Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.Notes:90 seconds is the factory default setting.A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the display, and the value is not saved.

TCP/IP menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP

Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.

Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP	host name. Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address View or change the current	TCP/IP address. Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current	TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current	TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP On Off	Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment. Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP On Off	Specify the RARP address assignment setting. Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP On Off	Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting. Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP Yes No	Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting. Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP Yes No	Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer Protocol. Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server Yes No	Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser. Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change	the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNSYesNo	View or change the current DDNS setting.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNSYesNo	View or change the current mDNS setting.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change	the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address View or	change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPSYesNo	View or change the current HTTPS setting.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

IPv6 menu

To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:

• Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
• Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6

Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Use To
Enable IPv6OnOff	Enable IPv6 in the printer.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto ConfigurationOnOff	Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Set the host name.	Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6OnOff	Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.Note: On is the factory default setting.

Wireless menu

Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless network adapter.

To access the menu, navigate to:

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless

Use To
Wi-Fi Protected SetupStart Push Button MethodStart PIN Method	Establish a wireless network and enable network security.Notes:•Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network when buttons on both the printer and the access point (wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.•Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto-detectionEnableDisable	Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network ModeBSS TypeInfrastructureAd hoc	Specify the network mode.Notes:•Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer access a network using an access point.•Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer.
Compatibility802.11b/g802.11b/g/n	Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network Select an available network for	the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method	for the wireless network.

AppleTalk menu

Note: This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional wireless network adapter is installed.

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk

Use To
ActivateYesNo	Enable or disable AppleTalk support.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.	Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.	Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Set Zone[list of zones available on the network]	Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.

Standard USB menu

Use To
PCL SmartSwitchOnOff	Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.Notes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitchOnOff	Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.Notes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA ModeOnOffAuto	Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.Notes:Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data, determine the format, and then process it appropriately.The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
USB BufferDisabledAuto3K to [maximum size allowed]	Set the size of the USB input buffer.Notes:Auto is the factory default setting.Disabled turns off job buffering.The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-KB increments.The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.To increase the maximum size range for USB Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PSOnOffAuto	Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.Notes:Auto is the factory default setting.On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA AddressYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY	Set the network address information for an external print server.Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
ENA NetmaskYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY	Set the netmask information for an external print server.Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
ENA GatewayYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY	Set the gateway information for an external print server.Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

SMTP Setup menu

Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port	Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout5–30	Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send an e-mail.Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Reply Address	Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the printer.
Use SSLDisabledNegotiateRequired	Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the SMTP server.Notes:Disabled is the factory default setting.When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used.
SMTP Server AuthenticationNo authentication requiredLogin/PlainCRAM-MD5Digest-MD5NTLMKerberos 5	Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e-mail privileges.Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Device-Initiated E-mailNoneUse Device SMTP Credentials	Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server.Notes:None is the factory default setting for Device-Initiated E-mail and User-Initiated E-mail.“Device UserID” and “Device password” are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User-Initiated E-mailNoneUse Device SMTP CredentialsUse Session User ID and PasswordUse Session E-mail address and PasswordPrompt user
Device UserID
Device password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain

Security menu

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu

Use To
Login RestrictionsLogin failuresFailure time frameLockout timePanel Login TimeoutRemote Login Timeout	Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out.Notes:“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out. You can choose from 1 to 10 attempts. The factory default setting is 3.“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out. You can choose from 1 to 60 minutes. The factory default setting is 5 minutes.“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit. You can choose from 1 to 60 minutes. The factory default setting is 5 minutes. The printer does not impose a lockout time if you set to 1 minute.Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home screen before automatically logging the user off. You can choose from 1 to 900 seconds. The factory default setting is 30 seconds.Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off. You can choose from 1 to 120 minutes. The factory default setting is 10 minutes.
Minimum PIN Length1–16	Limit the digit length of the PIN.Note:4 is the factory default setting.

Confidential Print menu

Use To
Max Invalid PINOff2–10	Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.Notes:This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.Once the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job ExpirationOff1 hour4 hours24 hours1 week	Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted.Notes:If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are deleted.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Repeat Job ExpirationOff1 hour4 hours24 hours1 week	Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Verify Job ExpirationOff1 hour4 hours24 hours1 week	Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job ExpirationOff1 hour4 hours24 hours1 week	Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Disk Wiping menu

Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.

Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.

Use To
Wiping ModeAuto	Specify the mode for disk wiping.
Automatic MethodSingle passMultiple pass	Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.Notes:“Single pass” is the factory default setting.Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn the printer off for an extended amount of time.Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method.

Security Audit Log menu

Use To
Export Log Let an authorized user export the security audit log. Note: The log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved on a computer.
Delete Log Yes No	Specify whether audit logs are deleted. Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Configure Log Enable Audit Yes No Enable Remote Syslog No Yes Remote Syslog Facility 0-23 Severity of events to log 0-7	Specify how audit logs are configured. Notes: •Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting. •Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the factory default setting. •Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting. •If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.

Set Date and Time menu

Use To
Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time [input date/time]	Enter the date and time.Notes:•Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No.• The wizard lets you set the date and time in YYYY-MM-DD-HH:MM format.
Time Zone[list of time zones]	Select the time zone.Note: GMT is the factory default settings.
Automatically observe DSTOnOff	Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times associated with the printer Time Zone setting.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable NTPOnOff	Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network.Notes:•On is the factory default setting.•This setting is turned off if you manually set the date and time.

Settings menu

General Settings menu

Use To
Display LanguageEnglishFrancaisDeutschItalianoEspanolDanskNorskNederlandsSvenskaPortugueseSuomiRussianPolskiGreekMagyarTurkceCeskySimplified ChineseTraditional ChineseKoreanJapanese	Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.
Show supply estimatesShow estimatesDo not show estimates	Display the estimates of the supplies on the printer control panel, Embedded Web Server, menu settings, and device statistics reports.Note: “Show estimates” is the factory default setting.
Eco-ModeOffEnergyEnergy/PaperPaper	Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.Notes:Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its factory default settings.Energy minimizes the power used by the printer. Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media.Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
ADF Loaded BeepEnabledDisabled	Specify a custom beep when paper is loaded in the ADF.Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Quiet ModeOffOn	Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.Notes:Off is the factory default setting. This supports the performance specifications for your printer.On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible. This is best suited for printing text and line art.For optimal printing of color-rich documents, set Quiet Mode to Off.Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing.
Run Initial setupYesNo	Run the setup wizard.Notes:Yes is the factory default setting.After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the “Country select” screen, the default becomes No.
Keyboard Keyboard Type English Francais Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Korean Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Japanese Custom Key [x]	Specify a language and custom key information for the printer keyboard.
Paper Sizes U.S. Metric	Specify the default system of measurement for paper sizes.Notes:U.S. is the factory default setting.Initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard.Changing this setting also changes the default for each input source in the Paper Size/Paper Type menu.Changing this setting also changes the default for the Original Size setting in the following menus: Copy Settings, Fax Settings, E-mail Settings, FTP Settings, and the Scan Settings section of Flash Drive Menu Settings.
Scan to PC Port Range [port range]	Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon.Note:9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Displayed InformationLeft sideRight sideCustom Text [x][text entry]	Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screen.For the “Left side” and “Right side” menus, select from the following options:NoneIP AddressHostnameContact NameLocationDate/Time mDNS/DDNS Service NameZero Configuration NameCartridge LevelCustom Text [x]Notes:IP Address is the factory default setting for “Left side.”Date/Time is the factory default setting for “Right side.”
Displayed Information (continued)Black TonerCyan TonerMagenta TonerYellow TonerFuserTransfer Module	Customize the displayed information for the Black Toner, Cyan Toner, Magenta Toner, Yellow Toner, Fuser, and Transfer Module settings.Select from the following options:When to displayDo not displayDisplayMessage to displayDefaultAlternateDefault[text entry]Alternate[text entry]Notes:“Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When to display.”Default is the factory default setting for “Message to display.”
Displayed Information (continued)Waste Toner BottlePaper JamLoad PaperService Errors	Specify the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle, Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service Errors settings.Select from the following options:DisplayYesNoMessage to displayDefaultAlternateDefault[text entry]Alternate[text entry]Notes:No is the factory default setting for Activate.Default is the factory default setting for “Type of Message to Display”.
Home screen customizationChange LanguageCopyCopy ShortcutsFaxFax ShortcutsE-mailE-mail ShortcutsFTPFTP ShortcutsSearch Held JobsHeld JobsUSB DriveProfiles and SolutionsBookmarksJobs by userForms and FavoritesBasic Card CopyScan to NetworkMy ShortcutsMulti-Send	Add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the home screen. For each icon or button, select from the following options:DisplayDo Not Display
Date FormatMM-DD-YYYYDD-MM-YYYYYYYY-MM-DD	Format the printer date.Notes:MM-DD-YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Time Format12 hour A.M./P.M.24 hour clock	Format the printer time.Note: “12 hour A.M./P.M.” is the factory default setting.
Screen Brightness20–100	Specify the brightness of the printer control panel screen.Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
One Page CopyOffOn	Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Audio FeedbackButton FeedbackOnOffVolume1–10	Set the audio volume for the buttons.Notes:•On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.•5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Show BookmarksYesNo	Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.Notes:•Yes is the factory default setting.• If you select No, then the Bookmarks container is never shown in Held Jobs.
Allow Background RemovalOnOff	Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, fax, e-mail, FTP, or scan-to-USB jobs.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow Custom Job ScansOnOff	Determine if Custom Job and Custom Job scanning settings appear for copy, scan, and fax jobs.Notes:•On is the factory default setting.•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Scanner Jam RecoveryJob levelPage level	Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF.Notes:•“Job level” is the factory default setting.• If Job level is selected, then the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam.• If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate30–300	Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes.Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer.	Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Location Specify the location of the printer.	Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
AlarmsAlarm ControlCartridge Alarm	Set an alarm when the printer requires operator intervention.When activated, Alarm Control lets you set the number of times that the alarm sounds, while Cartridge Alarm lets you stop printing when a cartridge-low condition occurs.For each alarm type, select from the following options:OffSingleContinuousNotes:Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control and Cartridge Alarm. This sounds three quick beeps.Off means no alarm will sound.Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
TimeoutsStandby ModeDisabled1-240	Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer enters a lower power state.Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
TimeoutsSleep ModeDisabled1-120	Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power state.Notes:30 is the factory default setting.Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off.Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require longer warm-up times.Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm-up time.
TimeoutsHibernate TimeoutDisabled1-3 hours6 hours1-3 days1-2 weeks1 month	Set the printer to operate at a low power state.Notes:Disabled is the factory default setting for Class A and Class B printers in all countries except for European Union countries and Switzerland."3 days" is the factory default setting for Class B printers in all European Union countries and Switzerland.
TimeoutsHibernate Timeout on ConnectionHibernateDo Not Hibernate	Set the printer to follow the setting of “Hibernate Timeout” even when an active Ethernet or fax connection exists.Notes:Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.If “Hibernate Timeout on Connection” is set to Do Not Hibernate, then the device never automatically hibernates.If “Hibernate Timeout on Connection” is set to Hibernate, then the device follows the value of the “Hibernate Timeout” setting, except when it is set to Disabled.
TimeoutsScreen Timeout15–300	Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning the printer display to Ready state.Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
TimeoutsProlong Screen TimeoutOnOff	Set the printer to continue the specified job without returning to the home screen when the screen timeout timer expires.Notes:Off is the factory default setting. This follows the normal Screen Timeout expires workflow.On continues to show the same screen and allows the user to reset the Screen Timeout timer instead of returning to the home screen.
TimeoutsPrint TimeoutDisabled1–255	Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end-of-job message before canceling the remainder of the print job.Notes:90 is the factory default setting.When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting.Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
TimeoutsWait TimeoutDisabled15–65535	Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job.Notes:40 is the factory default setting.Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs.
TimeoutsJob Hold Timeout5-255	Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue.Notes:30 is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Error RecoveryAuto RebootReboot when idleReboot alwaysReboot never	Set the printer to restart when an error is encountered.Note: “Reboot always” is the factory default setting.
Error RecoveryMax Auto Reboots1-20	Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can perform.Notes:5 is the factory default setting.If the printer performs a number of automatic reboots that is the same as the menu setting within a certain amount of time, then the printer shows the applicable error instead of restarting.
Print RecoveryAuto ContinueDisabled5-255	Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period.Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print RecoveryJam RecoveryOnOffAuto	Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.Notes:Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print RecoveryPage ProtectOffOn	Print a page that may not have printed otherwise.Notes:Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints.
Press Sleep ButtonDo NothingSleepHibernate	Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short press of the Sleep button.Notes:Sleep is the factory default setting.Do Nothing ignores any Sleep button presses regardless of duration.
Press and Hold Sleep ButtonDo NothingSleepHibernate	Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long press of the Sleep button.Note: Do Nothing is the factory default setting. This ignores any Sleep button presses regardless of duration.
Factory DefaultsDo Not RestoreRestore Now	Restore printer settings to its factory defaults.Notes:Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the user-defined settings.Restore Now restores all printer settings to the factory default settings except those in Network/Ports menu. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.
Export Configuration PackageExport	Export the printer configuration package to a flash drive.Note: The configuration package cannot be exported unless a flash drive is attached to the printer.

Copy Settings menu

Use To
Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto	Specify the content of the original document.Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content SourceBlack/White LaserColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specify how the original document was produced.Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
ColorOnOff	Specify whether copies are printed in color.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow color copiesOnOff	Enable color in copies.Notes:On is the factory default setting.Setting this to Off hides all color-specific menus.This setting overrides the Color setting.
Sides (Duplex)1 sided to 1 sided1 sided to 2 sided2 sided to 1 sided2 sided to 2 sided	Specify whether an original document is two-sided (duplex) or one-sided, and then specify whether the copy should be two-sided or one-sided.Notes:1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side, and the copy will also have print on one side.1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the copy will have print on both sides.2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the copy will have print on just one side.2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper SaverOff2-up Portrait2-up Landscape4-up Portrait4-up Landscape	Allow copying of two or four sheets of a document on one page.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Print Page BordersOnOff	Allow page borders in printed copies.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Collate(1,1,1) (2,2,2)(1,2,3) (1,2,3)	Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.Note: "(1,2,3) (1,2,3)" is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementOficio (Mexico)UniversalAuto Size SenseMixed SizesA4A5A6JIS B5Custom Scan Size [x]Book OriginalBusiness Card3 x 5 in.4 x 6 in.ID Card	Specify the paper size of the original document.Notes:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.
Copy To SourceTray [x]Manual FeederMultipurpose Feeder	Specify the paper source for copy jobs.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency SeparatorsOnOff	Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Separator SheetsOffBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages	Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]Multipurpose Feeder	Specify the separator sheet source.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Specify the level of darkness for the copy job.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Number of Copies1-999	Specify the number of copies for the copy job.Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Header/Footer[Location]OffDate/TimePage numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text	Specify header and footer information and its location on the page.Select from the following location options:Top leftTop middleTop rightBottom leftBottom middleBottom rightNotes:Off is the factory default setting for the location."All pages" is the factory default setting for "Print on."
OverlayConfidentialCopyDraftUrgentCustomOff	Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay Specify the custom overlay text.	Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copiesOnOff	Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanningOnOff	Copy in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto CenterOffOn	Automatically center the content on the page.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue	Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255	Specify which color to drop during copies, and how much the dropout is increased or decreased.Notes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast0-5Best for content	Specify the contrast used for the copy job.Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Create a mirror image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Create a negative image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew FixAutoOffOn	Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Allow edge-to-edge scanning of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5	Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs.Notes:0 is the factory default setting."Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.
Sample CopyOffOn	Create a sample copy of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Fax Settings menu

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu

Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.

General Fax Settings

Use To
Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number Specify the telephone number assigned to the fax.
Fax IDFax NameFax Number	Specify how the fax is identified.
Enable Manual FaxOnOff	Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory UseAll receiveMostly receiveEqualMostly sendAll send	Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.Notes:"Equal" is the factory default setting. This splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.Mostly send" specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.All send" specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.All receive" specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.Mostly receive" specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Cancel FaxesAllowDon't Allow	Specify whether the printer cancels fax jobs.Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Caller IDOffPrimaryAlternate	Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Fax number maskingOffFrom leftFrom right	Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.The number of characters masked is determined by the "Digits to Mask" setting.
Digits to Mask0–58	Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Fax Cover Page	Configure the fax cover page.
Fax Cover Page	Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]

Fax Send Settings

Use To
ResolutionStandardFine 200 dpiSuper Fine 300 dpi	Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementOficio (Mexico)UniversalAuto Size SenseMixed SizesA4A5A6JIS B5Custom Scan Size [x]Book OriginalBusiness Card3 x 5 in.4 x 6 in.	Specify the paper size of the original document.Notes:Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.
Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge	Specify how text and graphics are oriented on a page.Notes:Off is the factory default setting."Long edge" assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape)."Short edge" assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto	Specify the content of the original document.Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content SourceBlack/White LaserColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specify how the original document was produced.Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Adjust the darkness of the output.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Dialing Prefix RulesPrefix Rule [x]	Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Automatic Redial0-9	Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial frequency1-200	Specify the number of minutes between redials.Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABXYesNo	Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enable ECMYesNo	Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable Fax ScansOnOff	Fax files that are scanned at the printer.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Driver to faxYesNo	Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Dial ModeTonePulse	Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Max Speed2400480096001440033600	Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanningOnOff	Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.Notes:•Off is the factory default setting.•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Scan PreviewOnOff	Show a preview on the display for scan jobs.Notes:•Off is the factory default setting.•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue	Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255	Specify which color to drop, and how much the dropout is increased or decreased.Notes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast0-5Best for content	Specify the contrast in the scanned image.Note:“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Create a mirror image of the original document.Note:Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Create a negative image of the original document.Note:Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew FixAutoOffOn	Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.Note:Auto is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Allow edge-to-edge scanning of the original document prior to faxing.Note:Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5	Adjust the sharpness of a fax.Note:3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs.Notes:0 is the factory default setting.“Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.
Enable Color Fax ScansOff by defaultOn by defaultNever useAlways use	Enable color faxing.Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono FaxesOnOff	Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.Note: On is the factory default setting.

Fax Receive Settings

Use To
Enable Fax ReceiveOnOff	Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job WaitingNoneTonerToner and Supplies	Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable resources.Note: None is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer1–25	Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto AnswerYesNo	Allow the printer to answer an incoming fax job.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Manual Answer Code0–9	Enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax.Notes:9 is the factory default setting.This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone.
Auto ReductionOnOff	Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Paper SourceAutoTray [x]Manual FeederMultipurpose Feeder	Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)OffOn	Enable two-sided (duplex) printing for incoming fax jobs.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator SheetsOffBefore JobAfter Job	Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify where the printer picks the separator sheet.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Fax FooterOnOff	Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Max Speed2400480096001440033600	Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Fax ForwardingPrintPrint and ForwardForward	Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Forward toFaxE-mailFTPLDSSeSF	Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded.Notes:Fax is the factory default setting.This menu item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut	Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF).
Block No Name FaxOffOn	Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID specified.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Holding FaxesHeld Fax ModeOffAlways OnManualScheduledFax Holding Schedule	Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax ReceiveOnOff	Enable the printer to receive fax in color.Note: On is the factory default setting.

Fax Log Settings

Use To
Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error	Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Receive Error LogPrint NeverPrint on Error	Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Auto Print LogsOnOff	Enable automatic printing of fax logs.Notes:•On is the factory default setting.•Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Logs DisplayRemote Station NameDialed Number	Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax name returned.Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job LogOnOff	Enable access to the Fax Job log.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Call LogOnOff	Enable access to the Fax Call log.Note: On is the factory default setting.

Speaker Settings

Use To
Speaker ModeAlways OffOn until ConnectedAlways On	Specify the mode of the speaker.Notes:“On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the fax connection is made.Always On turns the speaker on.Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker VolumeHighLow	Control the volume setting.Note: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer VolumeOffOn	Control the fax speaker ringer volume.Note: On is the factory default setting.

Answer On

Use To
All RingsSingle Ring OnlyDouble Ring OnlyTriple Ring OnlySingle or Double Rings OnlySingle or Triple Rings OnlyDouble or Triple Rings Only	Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.

Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu

Fax Mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.

Use To
To Format	Enter specific fax information using the virtual keyboard on the printer control panel.
Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup Specify SMTP setup information.
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP	server port information.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Image FormatPDF (.pdf)XPS (.xps)TIFF (.tif)	Specify the image type for scanning to fax.Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.
Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto	Specify the content of the original document.Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content SourceBlack/White LaserColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specify how the content was originally produced.Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Fax ResolutionStandardFine 200 dpiSuper Fine 300 dpi	Specify the resolution level for scanning to fax.
Darkness1-9	Adjust the darkness of the output.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementOficio (Mexico)UniversalAuto Size SenseMixed SizesA4A5A6JIS B5Custom Scan Size [x]Book OriginalBusiness Card4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.	Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.Notes:Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.
Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff	Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan-to-fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the scan job.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enable Analog ReceiveOffOn	Enable receiving of analog faxes.Note: Off is the factory default setting.

E-mail Settings menu

Use To
E-mail Server SetupSubjectMessageFile Name	Specify e-mail server information.Notes:You can type up to 255 characters in the Subject field.You can type up to 512 characters in the Message field.You can type up to 53 characters in the File Name field.
E-mail Server SetupSend me a copyNever appearsOn by defaultOff by defaultAlways On	Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.
E-mail Server SetupMax E-mail size0-65535 KB	Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes (KB).Note: E-mails above the specified size are not sent.
E-mail Server SetupSize Error Message	Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.Note: You can type up to 1024 characters.
E-mail Server SetupLimit destinations	Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e-mail destinations only to that domain name.Note: You can specify only one domain.
E-mail Server SetupWeb Link SetupServerLoginPasswordPathFile NameWeb Link	Define the e-mail server path name, for example: /directory/path.Notes:The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.You can type up to 128 characters for Server, Login, Password, Path, and Web Link.You can type up to 53 characters for File Name.
FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDFTIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps)	Specify the format of the scanned file.Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.
PDF Version1.2-1.6A-1a	Set the version of the PDF file to be scanned for e-mailing.Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto	Specify the content of the original document.Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content SourceBlack/White LaserColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specify how the original document was produced.Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
ColorOffOn	Specify whether to print copies in color.
Resolution75 dpi150 dpi200 dpi300 dpi400 dpi600 dpi	Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Adjust the darkness of the output.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Specify the orientation of the scanned image.Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementOficio (Mexico)UniversalAuto Size SenseMixed SizesA4A5A6JIS B5Custom Scan Size [x]Book OriginalBusiness Card3 x 5 in.4 x 6 in.	Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.Notes:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.When set, a defined custom name appears instead of Custom Scan Size [x].Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.
Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge	Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on the page.Notes:Off is the factory default setting."Long edge" assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape)."Short edge" assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG QualityBest for content5-90	Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the imageNotes:"Best for content" is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default5-90	Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.Note:75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.Note:75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.Note:50 is the factory default setting.
E-mail images sent asAttachmentWeb Link	Specify how images are sent.Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff	Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan-to-e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error	Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.Note: “Print log “is the factory default setting.
Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
E-mail Bit Depth1 bit8 bit	Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images.Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanningOnOff	Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Scan PreviewOnOff	Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.Notes:On is the factory default setting.When this is set to Off, the “Save as Shortcut” button does not appear on the e-mail Destination screen.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue	Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255	Specify which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout.Notes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast0-5Best for content	Specify the contrast of the output.Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Create a mirror image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Create a negative image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Allow edge-to-edge scanning of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5	Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs.Notes:0 is the factory default setting."Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default, while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.
Use cc:/bcc:OffOn	Enable the use of the “cc” and “bcc” fields.Note: Off is the factory default setting.

FTP Settings menu

Use To
FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDF (.pdf)TIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps)	Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.
PDF Version1.2-1.6A-1a	Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto	Specify the content of the original document.Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content SourceBlack/White LaserColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specify how the original document was produced.Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
ColorOffOn	Specify whether to print copies in color.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution75 dpi150 dpi200 dpi300 dpi400 dpi600 dpi	Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Adjust the darkness of the output.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Specify the orientation of the scanned image.Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementOficio (Mexico)UniversalAuto Size SenseMixed SizesA4A5A6JIS B5Custom Scan Size [x]Book OriginalBusiness Card3 x 5 in.4 x 6 in.	Specify the paper size of the original document.Notes:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.When set, a defined custom name appears instead of Custom Scan Size [x].Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.
Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge	Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on the page.Notes:Off is the factory default setting."Long edge" assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape)."Short edge" assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG QualityBest for content5-90	Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.Notes:"Best for content" is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size and the quality of the image.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default5-90	Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.Note:75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.Note:75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.Note:50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff	Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan-to-FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error	Specify whether the transmission log prints.Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
FTP bit Depth1 bit8 bit	Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images.Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.
File Name Type a base file name.	Note: You can type up to 53 characters.
Custom Job ScanningOnOff	Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Scan PreviewOnOff	Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue	Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255	Specify which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout.Notes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast0-5Best for content	Specify the contrast of the output.Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Create a mirror image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Create a negative image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Allow edge-to-edge scanning of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5	Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned imageNote: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs.Notes:0 is the factory default setting."Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.

Flash Drive menu

Scan Settings menu

Use To
FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDFTIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps)	Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.
PDF Version1.2-1.6A1-a	Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto	Specify the content of the original document.Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content SourceBlack/White LaserColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specify how the original document was produced.Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
ColorOnOff	Specify whether the device captures and transmits content in color or in black and white.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution75 dpi150 dpi200 dpi300 dpi400 dpi600 dpi	Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Adjust the darkness of the output.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Specify the orientation of the scanned image.Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementOficio (Mexico)UniversalAuto Size SenseMixed SizesA4A5A6JIS B5Custom Scan Size [x]Book OriginalBusiness Card3 x 5 in.4 x 6 in.	Specify the paper size of the original document.Notes:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.When set, a defined custom name appears instead of Custom Scan Size [x].
Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge	Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page.Notes:Off is the factory default setting."Long edge" assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape)."Short edge" assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG QualityBest for content5-90	Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.Notes:"Best for content" is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is reduced.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default5-90	Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and quality of the image.Note:75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.Note:75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.Note:50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff	Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan-to-FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Scan Bit Depth1 bit8 bit	Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when Color is set to Off.Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.
File Name Type a base file name.	Note: You can enter a maximum of 53 characters.
Custom Job scanningOnOff	Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Scan PreviewOnOff	Show a preview on the display for scan jobs.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of background visible in a scanned image.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue	Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255	Specify which color to drop during scanning, and how much the dropout is increased or decreased.Notes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast0-5Best for content	Specify the contrast of the output.Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Create a mirror image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Create a negative image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew FixAutoOffOn	Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Allow edge-to-edge scanning of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5	Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs.Notes:•0 is the factory default setting.•“Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.

Print Settings menu

Use To
Copies1–999	Specify a default number of copies for each print job.Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper SourceTray [x]MP FeederManual PaperManual Envelope	Set a default paper source for all print jobs.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
ColorColorBlack Only	Specify whether the device captures and transmits content in color or in black and white.Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Collate(1,1,1) (2,2,2)(1,2,3) (1,2,3)	Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)1 sided2 sided	Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.Note: “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
Duplex BindingLong EdgeShort Edge	Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.Notes:Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver OrientationAutoLandscapePortrait	Specify the orientation of a multiple-page document.Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Paper SaverOff2-Up3-Up4-Up6-Up9-Up12-Up16-Up	Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.When the number of pages per sheet is selected, each page is scaled so that the number of pages you want can be displayed on the sheet.
Paper Saver BorderNoneSolid	Print a border on each page.Note: None is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver OrderingHorizontalReverse HorizontalReverse VerticalVertical	Specify the order in which pages are printed on a single sheet when using Paper Saver.Notes:Horizontal is the factory default setting.Positioning depends on the number of pages and their orientation.
Separator SheetsOffBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages	Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)”. If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify the paper source for separator sheets.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank PagesDo Not PrintPrint	Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Print Settings

Setup menu

Use To
Printer LanguagePCL EmulationPS Emulation	Set the default printer language.Notes:PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.
Job WaitingOnOff	Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When the missing information or options are obtained, the stored jobs print.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print AreaNormalFit to PageWhole Page	Set the logical and physical printable area.Notes:Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting. Whole Page only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Printer UsageMax YieldMax Speed	Set the printer for a faster print speed or for a higher toner yield.Note: Max Yield is the factory default setting.
Black Only ModeOnOff	Set the printer to print text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download TargetRAMFlashDisk	Set the storage location for downloads.Notes:RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the RAM is temporary.Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off.This menu item appears only when a flash drive or a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Resource SaveOnOff	Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than is available.Notes:Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.On retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then Memory Full [38] appears, and downloads are not deleted.
Print All OrderAlphabeticalOldest FirstNewest First	Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected.Note:Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.

Finishing menu

Use To
Sides (Duplex)1 sided2 sided	Specify whether two-sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.Notes:“1 sided” is the factory default setting.You can set two-sided printing from the printer software.For Windows users:Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.For Macintosh users:Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
Duplex BindingLong EdgeShort Edge	Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.Notes:Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies1-999	Specify the default number of copies for each print job.Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank PagesDo Not PrintPrint	Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate(1,1,1) (2,2,2)(1,2,3) (1,2,3)	Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Separator SheetsOffBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages	Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document.
Separator SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify the paper source for separator sheets.Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Paper SaverOff2-Up3-Up4-Up6-Up9-Up12-Up16-Up	Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.When the number of pages per sheet is selected, each page is scaled so that the number of pages you want can be displayed on the sheet.
Paper Saver OrderingHorizontalReverse HorizontalReverse VerticalVertical	Specify the order in which pages are printed on a single sheet when using Paper Saver.Notes:Horizontal is the factory default setting.Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or in landscape orientation.
Paper Saver OrientationAutoLandscapePortrait	Specify the orientation in which pages are printed on a single sheet.Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver BorderNoneSolid	Print a border when using Paper Saver.Note: None is the factory default setting.

Quality menu

Use To
Print ModeColorBlack Only	Specify whether images are printed in black and white or in color.Notes:•Color is the factory default setting.•The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting.
Color CorrectionAutoOffManual	Adjust the color output on the printed page.Notes:• Auto is the factory default setting. This applies different color conversion tables to each object on the printed page.•Off turns off color correction.• Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from the Manual Color menu.•Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page.
Print Resolution1200 dpi4800 CQ	Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch or in color quality (CQ).Note: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness1-5	Lighten or darken the printed output.Notes:•4 is the factory default setting.•Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine LinesOnOff	Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts.Notes:•Off is the factory default setting.•To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP address in the Web browser address field.•You can set this option from the software program.For Windows users:Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.For Macintosh users:Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
Color SaverOnOff	Reduce the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner used for text is not reduced.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.On overrides Toner Darkness settings.
RGB Brightness-6 to 6	Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner by lightening the output.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
RGB Contrast0-5	Adjust the contrast of printed objects.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
RGB Saturation0-5	Adjust saturation in color outputs.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
Color BalanceCyan-5 to 5Magenta-5 to 5Yellow-5 to 5Black-5 to 5Reset Defaults	Adjust color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner being used for each color.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
Color SamplessRGB DisplaysRGB VividDisplay—True BlackVividOff—RGBUS CMYKEuro CMYKVivid CMYKOff—CMYK	Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the printer.Notes:Selecting any setting prints the sample.Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be used to help decide which combinations to use to get the printed output you want.To access a complete list of color sample pages using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP address in the Web browser address field.
Manual ColorRGB ImageRGB TextRGB Graphics	Customize the RGB color conversions.Select from the following options:VividsRGB DisplayDisplay—True BlacksRGB VividOffNotes:sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a color conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer monitor.sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics. This applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred for business graphics and text.Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated colors.“Display—True Black” applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for neutral gray colors.Off turns off color conversion.
Manual Color (continued)CMYK ImageCMYK TextCMYK Graphics	Customize the CMYK color conversions.Select from the following options:US CMYKEuro CMYKVivid CMYKOffNotes:US CMYK is the factory default setting. This applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output.Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting. This applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches Euroscale color output.Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US conversion table.Off turns off color conversion.
Spot Color Replacement Assign spec	specific CMYK values to named spot colors.Note:This menu is available only in the Embedded Web Server.
Color Adjust	Initiate a recalibration of color conversion tables and allow the printer to make adjustments for color variations in output.Notes:Adjusting color starts when the menu is selected. Adjusting color appears on the display until the process is finished.Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as room temperature and humidity. Color adjustments are made on printer algorithms. Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process.

Job Accounting menu

Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the printer hard disk is not read/write- or write-protected.

Use To
Job Accounting LogOffOn	Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log FrequencyWeeklyMonthly	Determine and set how often a log file is created.Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of FrequencyNoneE-mail Current LogE-mail & Delete Current LogPost Current LogPost & Delete Current Log	Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.Note: None is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full LevelOff1–99	Specify the maximum size of the log file.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full ActionNoneE-mail Current LogE-mail & Delete Current LogE-mail & Delete Oldest LogPost Current LogPost & Delete Current LogPost & Delete Oldest LogDelete Current LogDelete Oldest LogDelete All LogsDelete All But Current	Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.Notes:None is the factory default setting.The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered.
Disk Full ActionNoneE-mail & Delete Current LogE-mail & Delete Oldest LogPost & Delete Current LogPost & Delete Oldest LogDelete Current LogDelete Oldest LogDelete All LogsDelete All But Current	Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit (100MB).Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E-mail to Send Logs	Specify the e-mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log file prefix.

Utilities menu

Use To
Remove Held JobsConfidentialHeldNot RestoredAll	Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.Notes:Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not affected.Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory.
Format FlashYesNo	Format the flash memory.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted.Notes:Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.No cancels the format request.Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in the printer.The flash memory option card must not be read/write- or write-protected.This menu item appears only when a non-defective flash memory card is installed.
Delete Downloads on DiskDelete NowDo Not Delete	Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs, and parked jobs.Notes:Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to return to the originating screen after the deletion.Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for touch-screen printer models. When selected in non-touch-screen printer models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.Notes:When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation, and control codes are not executed.To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Coverage EstimatorOffOn	Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.Note: Off is the factory default setting.

XPS menu

Use To
Print Error PagesOffOn	Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.Note: Off is the factory default setting.

PDF menu

Use To
Scale to FitYesNo	Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.Note: No is the factory default setting.
AnnotationsDo Not PrintPrint	Print annotations in a PDF.Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

PostScript menu

Use To
Print PS ErrorOnOff	Print a page containing the PostScript error.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup ModeOnOff	Enable users to disable the SysStart file.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Font PriorityResidentFlash/Disk	Establish the font search order.Notes:•Resident is the factory default setting.• This menu item appears only when a formatted, non-defective flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed.•Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read/write-, write-, or password-protected.•Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Image SmoothingOnOff	Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low-resolution images and smoothen their color transitions.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in resolution.

PCL Emul menu

Use To
Font SourceResidentDiskDownloadFlashAll	Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.Notes:“Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.“Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write-, write-, or password-protected.“Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.“All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font NameCourier 10	Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.
Symbol Set10U PC-812U PC-850	Specify the symbol set for each font name.Notes:10U PC-8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC-850 is the international factory default setting.A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation SettingsPoint Size1.00–1008.00	Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.Notes:12 is the factory default setting.Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 0.014 inch.Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25-point increments.
PCL Emulation SettingsPitch0.08-100	Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.Notes:10 is the factory default setting.Pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters per inch (cpi).Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01-cpi increments.For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation SettingsOrientationPortraitLandscape	Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.Notes:Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation SettingsLines per Page1-255	Specify the number of lines that print on each page.Notes:60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation SettingsA4 Width198 mm203 mm	Set the printer to print on A4-size paper.Notes:"198 mm" is the factory default setting.The 203-mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty 10-pitch characters.
PCL Emulation SettingsAuto CR after LFOnOff	Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after a line feed (LF) control command.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation SettingsAuto LF after CROnOff	Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a carriage return (CR) control command.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Tray RenumberAssign MP FeederOffNone0-199Assign Tray [x]OffNone0-199Assign Manual PaperOffNone0-199Assign Manual EnvOffNone0-199	Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays and feeders.Notes:“Off” is the factory default setting.“None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.“0-199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray RenumberView Factory DefaultsMPF Default = 8T1 Default = 1T1 Default = 4T1 Default = 5T1 Default = 20T1 Default = 21Env Default = 6MPaper Default = 2MEnv Default = 3	Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
Tray RenumberRestore DefaultsYesNo	Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.

HTML menu

Use To
Font Name	Joanna MT	Set the default font for HTML documents.
Albertus MT	Letter Gothic	Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not specify a font.
Antique Olive	Lubalin Graph
Apple Chancery	Marigold
Arial MT	MonaLisa Recut
Avant Garde	Monaco
Bodoni	New CenturySbk
Bookman	New York
Chicago	Optima
Clarendon	Oxford
Cooper Black	Palatino
Copperplate	StempelGaramond
Coronet	Taffy
Courier	Times
Eurostile	TimesNewRoman
Garamond	Univers
Geneva	Zapf Chancery
Gill Sans	NewSansMTCS
Goudy	NewSansMTCT
Helvetica	New SansMTJA
Hoefler Text	NewSansMTKO
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers

Use To
Font Size1–255 pt	Set the default font size for HTML documents.Notes:•12 pt is the factory default setting.• Font size can be increased in 1-point increments.
Scale1–400%	Scale the default font for HTML documents.Notes:•100% is the factory default setting.•Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Set the page orientation for HTML documents.Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Margin Size8–255 mm	Set the page margin for HTML documents.Notes:19 mm is the factory default setting.Margin size can be increased in 1-mm increments.
BackgroundsDo Not PrintPrint	Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Image menu

Use To
Auto FitOnOff	Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.
InvertOnOff	Invert bitonal monochrome images.Notes:•Off is the factory default setting.•This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
ScalingAnchor Top LeftBest FitAnchor CenterFit Height/WidthFit HeightFit Width	Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.Notes:•Best Fit is the factory default setting.•When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
OrientationPortraitLandscapeReverse PortraitReverse Landscape	Set the image orientation.Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Help menu

The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, e-mailing, and faxing.

English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available at http://support.lexmark.com.

Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about	making copies and changing settings
E-mail Guide	Provides information about sending e-mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Fax Guide Provides information about se	sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
FTP Guide Provides information about sc	anning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Color Quality Provides information about	solving color quality issues
Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies

Saving money and the environment

Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:

•The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
- The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner

Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.

For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco-Mode” on page 199.

Using recycled paper

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on page 59.

Conserving supplies

There are a number of ways you can reduce the amount of paper and toner you use when printing. You can:

Use both sides of the paper

If your printer model supports duplex printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2-sided printing from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper

You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N-Up) section of the Print dialog screen.

Check your first draft for accuracy

Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:

• Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar, to see what the document will look like before you print it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Avoid paper jams

Carefully select and load paper to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 239.

Saving energy

Using Eco-Mode

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco-Mode > select a setting

Use To
Off	Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco-Mode. Off supports the performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce	energy use, especially when the printer is idle.Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed.The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper	Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper	Enable the automatic two-sided (duplex) feature.Turn off print log features.

3 Click Submit.

Reducing printer noise

Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting

Use To
On Reduce printer noise.	Notes:•Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.•Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first page is printed.
Off Use factory default settings.	Note: This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer.

3 Click Submit.

Adjusting Sleep mode

To save energy, decrease the number of minutes the printer waits before it enters Sleep mode. Select from 1 to 120. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.

Note: The printer still accepts print jobs when in Sleep mode.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.

3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode

2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.

3 Touch

Using Hibernate Mode

Hibernate is an ultra-low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.

3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop-down menu, select Hibernate.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings

2 Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.

3 Touch Hibernate > √.

Setting Hibernate Timeout

Hibernate Timeout lets you set the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it goes into a reduced power state.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.

3 From the Hibernate Timeout menu, select the number of hours, days, weeks, or months you want for the printer to wait before it goes into a reduced power state.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout

2 Select the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it enters Hibernate mode.

3 Touch

Using Schedule Power Modes

Schedule Power Modes lets you schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into Ready state.

Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Schedule Power Modes.

3 From the Action menu, select the power mode.

4 From the Time menu, select the time.

5 From the Day(s) menu, select the day or days.

6 Click Add.

Adjusting the brightness of the display

To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading your display, adjust the brightness of the display.

Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings.

3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness

2 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.

3 Touch

Recycling

Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information, see:

•The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
- The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

Recycling Lexmark products

To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.

Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Securing the printer

Using the security lock feature

The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. Attach a security lock compatible with most laptop computers in the location shown to secure the printer in place.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with a magnified inset showing a printer's side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Statement of Volatility

Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.

Type of memory Description
Volatile memory	Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for printer-specific functionality. This lets the printer retain buffered user data from complex print jobs, as well as form data, and font data.

Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:

•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.

•The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
- The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
- The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.

Disposing of a printer hard disk

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.

• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits

Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data are completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.

Erasing volatile memory

The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered data, simply turn off the printer.

Erasing non-volatile memory

Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following these steps:

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 on the keypad while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display instead of the standard home screen icons.

3 Touch Wipe All Settings.

The printer will restart several times during this process.

Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer memory.

4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

The printer will perform a power-on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Erasing printer hard disk memory

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.

Using the printer control panel

1 Turn off the printer.

2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.

3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:

• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22-M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.

Notes:

• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

The printer will perform a power-on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Configuring printer hard disk encryption

Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.

Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.

3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.

Notes:

• Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.

3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.

Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.

Notes:

• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.

5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

The printer will perform a power-on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Finding printer security information

In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the Lexmark security Web page.

You can also see the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide for additional information:

1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2 In the Search field, type the model name of your printer, and then click Go.
3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide.

Maintaining the printer

Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.

Storing supplies

Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them.

Do not expose supplies to:

• Direct sunlight
  •Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
  •High humidity above 80%
  • Salty air
  •Corrosive gases
  •Heavy dust

Cleaning the printer parts

Cleaning the printer

Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.

1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.

2 Remove paper from the standard bin, multipurpose feeder, and manual feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.

5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.

Cleaning the scanner glass

Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.

1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2 Open the scanner cover.

Illustration of an open printer with a red arrow pointing to the lid, showing no text or symbols on the device itself.

3 Clean all the areas shown, and then let them dry.

Diagram of an open file organizer with numbered parts labeled 1 to 4

1 White underside of the ADF cover

2 White underside of the scanner cover

3 Scanner glass

4 ADF glass

4 Close the scanner cover.

Checking the status of parts and supplies

Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel

From the home screen, navigate to:

Status/Supplies > View Supplies

Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server

Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Device Status > More Details.

Estimated number of remaining pages

The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and other printer settings.

The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial estimates assume future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization* test methods and page content.

* Average continuous black or composite CMY declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

Ordering supplies

To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter- or A4-size plain paper.

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

Ordering toner cartridges

Notes:

• The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard.
• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.

Return Program cartridges

Item United States and Canada European Union (EU), European Economic Area (EEA), and Switzerland			Rest of the world
Return Program toner cartridges
Black 801K 802K 808K
Cyan 801C 802C 808C
Magenta 801M 802M 808M
Yellow 801Y 802Y 808Y
Standard Yield Return Program toner cartridges
Black 801SK 802SK 808SK
Cyan 801SC 802SC 808SC
Magenta 801SM 802SM 808SM
Yellow 801SY	802SY	808SY
High Yield Return Program toner cartridges
Black 801HK	802HK	808HK
Cyan 801HC	802HC	808HC
For more information on countries located in each region, visit www.lexmark.com/regions.

Item United States and Canada European Union (EU), European Economic Area (EEA), and Switzerland	Rest of the world
Magenta 801HM 802HM 808HM
Yellow 801HY 802HY 808HY
For more information on countries located in each region, visitwww.lexmark.com/regions.

Regular cartridges

Item Worldwide
Standard Yield regular toner cartridges
Black 800S1
Cyan 800S2
Magenta 800S3
Yellow	800S4
High Yield regular toner cartridges
Black 800H1
Cyan 800H2
Magenta 800H3
Yellow	800H4
For more information on countries located in each region, visit www.lexmark.com/regions.

Ordering imaging kits

Item	All countries and regions
Black imaging kit	700Z1
Color imaging kit	700Z5

Ordering a maintenance kit

Notes:

• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
• The fuser and transfer module are included in the maintenance kit and can also be individually ordered and replaced, if necessary.
• To replace the maintenance kit, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.

Part name	Type	Supply number
Maintenance kit	115 V	40X7615
	220 V	40X7616
	100 V	40X7617

Ordering a waste toner bottle

Item All countries and regions
Waste toner bottle C540X75G

Replacing supplies

Replacing the waste toner bottle

Exploded view diagram of a printer showing internal components with numbered labels

1 Top door

2 Waste toner bottle

3 Right side cover

4 Front door

1 Unpack the replacement waste toner bottle.
2 Open the front door.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

3 Open the top door.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure showing paper feed and paper roll, with red arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols visible)

Diagram of an HP printer internal structure showing internal components and a magnified view of the printer's internal structure (no text or symbols present)

4 Remove the right side cover.

Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with numbered annotations and directional arrows indicating process flow.

5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.

Diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled components and directional arrows indicating motion or flow

6 Seal the used waste toner bottle in the enclosed packaging.

For more information, see "Recycling Lexmark products" on page 203.

7 Insert the replacement waste toner bottle.

Diagram showing a mechanical component with highlighted parts and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

8 Insert the right side cover.

Illustration of a person interacting with a laptop, showing two circular views of the person's face (no text or symbols present)

9 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.

Diagram of an HP printer internal structure with numbered annotations indicating process steps

10 Close the front door.

Diagram of a printer with red arrows indicating internal components (no text or symbols present)

Replacing a black and color imaging kit

1 Open the front door.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

Close-up of a printer with red arrows indicating process flow, showing internal structure and no visible text or symbols.

2 Open the top door.

Diagram of an HP printer internal structure showing internal components and a magnified view of the printer's internal structure (no text or symbols present)

3 Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles, and then gently pulling them away from the imaging kit.

Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with numbered annotations and color-coded sections, highlighting a process step.

4 Remove the right side cover.

Diagram showing a mechanical device with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating process flow or movement.

5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered annotations highlighting components

6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull the imaging kit until it stops.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and directional arrows indicating motion or movement

7 Press down the blue lever, and then grasp the green handles on the sides to pull out the imaging kit.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.

8 Unpack the replacement black and color imaging kit.

Diagram showing a printer being processed into a stack of colored rollers (no text or symbols present)

Notes:

• The color imaging kit includes the imaging kit and the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black developer units.
•The black imaging kit includes the imaging kit and the black developer unit.

9 Seal the used imaging kit in the bag that the replacement imaging kit came in.

For more information, see "Recycling Lexmark products" on page 203.

Illustration of a printer with a paper sheet being placed into a color block (no text or symbols visible)

Note: When replacing the black imaging kit, save the cyan, magenta, and yellow developer units. Dispose only the black developer unit.

10 Gently shake the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units side-to-side.

Diagram of a black rectangular object with red arrows indicating rotational or directional movement (no text or symbols)

11 Remove the red packing strip and the attached fabric from the developer units.

Diagram of a mechanical assembly with red arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

12 Gently insert the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units.

Stacked black inkjet rollers with red arrows indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols visible)

Note: Make sure each developer unit is inserted into the matching color slot.

13 Remove the red packing strip from the imaging kit.

Diagram of a black ink mill machine with red components and airflow arrows, showing internal structure (no text or symbols)

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

Diagram showing a battery pack with a prohibition symbol and a crossed-out circuit breaker, indicating no protection or disapproval.

14 Align and then insert the imaging kit.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure showing color-coded components and a magnified inset (no text or symbols visible)

15 Gently but firmly push the blue levers down until the imaging kit fits into place.

Diagram showing mechanical assembly steps with numbered annotations indicating process flow

Note: Make sure that the imaging kit is fully seated.

16 Insert the waste toner bottle.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with highlighted parts and a magnified view of a green arrow (no text or symbols)

17 Insert the right side cover.

Close-up of a mechanical device with two circular insets showing a green component and red warning labels (no readable text or symbols)

18 Insert the toner cartridges.

3D rendering of a printer emitting a colorful block with a green leaf, no visible text or symbols

19 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.

Diagram of an HP printer showing internal components with numbered annotations indicating process steps

20 Close the front door.

Diagram of a printer with red arrows indicating internal components (no text or symbols present)

Replacing toner cartridges

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage caused by use of a non-Lexmark toner cartridge is not covered under warranty.

Note: A reduced print quality may result from using non-Lexmark toner cartridges.

1 Open the top door.

Illustration of a printer with an open lid and internal color-coded components, showing a magnified view of the printer's internal structure (no text or symbols visible)

2 Remove the toner cartridge by lifting the handle, and then gently pulling it away from the imaging kit.

Diagram showing printer operation steps with numbered annotations highlighting process flow

3 Unpack the new toner cartridge, and then remove its packaging.

Diagram showing a yellow and black component being processed by a curved paper sheet (no text or symbols)

4 Align the new toner cartridge, and then press the cartridge down until it fits into place.

3D rendering of a printer's internal components with colored paper strips and a red arrow indicating a section (no text or symbols visible)

5 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.

Diagram showing a printer with labeled parts and arrows indicating process steps, highlighting internal components.

6 Seal the used toner cartridge in the bag that the replacement toner cartridge came in. For more information, see "Recycling Lexmark products" on page 203.

Replacing a developer unit

Replace the developer unit when a print quality defect occurs or when damage occurs to the printer.

1 Open the front door.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and red arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols visible)

2 Open the top door.

Diagram of an HP printer internal structure showing internal components and a magnified view of the printer's internal structure (no text or symbols present)

3 Lift the toner cartridge handle, and then gently pull it from the imaging kit.

Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with numbered annotations and color-coded components, highlighting a process step.

4 Remove the right side cover.

Diagram showing a mechanical device with labeled parts and red arrows indicating process flow or movement, including numbered annotations.

5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.

Diagram showing engine components with numbered annotations highlighting specific parts of the engine.

6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull the imaging kit until it stops.

Diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and directional arrows indicating motion or movement

7 Press down the blue lever, and then grasp the green handles on the sides to pull out the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. Doing so could damage the imaging kit.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered annotations highlighting components and directional arrows

8 Remove the used developer unit.

Stacked black ink打印机 with colorful paper strips and a red arrow indicating compression (no text or symbols)

9 Gently shake the replacement developer unit side-to-side before removing it from its packaging.

Diagram of a black cylindrical object with red arrows indicating rotational or directional movement (no text or symbols)

10 Remove the red shipping cover from the developer unit.

Diagram of a mechanical assembly with red arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

11 Insert the developer unit.

Two black inkjet collectors with colored paper strips, one partially open and the other stacked (no text or symbols visible)

12 Align and then insert the imaging kit.

Close-up of a printer's internal components with a magnified inset showing color mapping (no text or symbols visible)

13 Gently but firmly push the blue levers down until the imaging kit fits into place.

Diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered annotations indicating steps of motion or assembly.

Note: Make sure that the imaging kit is fully seated.

14 Replace the waste toner bottle.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with red arrows indicating motion or force, and a magnified inset highlighting a green arrow (no text or symbols present)

15 Insert the right side cover.

Diagram showing two circular views of a device with a green silhouette and red warning symbols, no readable text or labels present.

16 Insert the toner cartridges.

3D rendering of a printer with a colorful cube and green leaf next to it, no visible text or symbols

17 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.

Diagram of an HP printer showing internal components with numbered annotations highlighting key parts and directional arrows.

18 Close the front door.

Diagram of a printer with red arrows indicating internal components (no text or symbols present)

19 Seal the used developer unit in the bag that the replacement developer unit came in. For more information, see "Recycling Lexmark products" on page 203.

Moving the printer

Before moving the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or a printer damage:

• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off the optional tray, and then set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same time.

Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.

Moving the printer to another location

The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:

• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware options.

- Keep the printer in an upright position.

- Avoid severe jarring movements.

Shipping the printer

When shipping the printer, use the original packaging.

Managing the printer

Finding advanced networking and administrator information

This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Checking the virtual display

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.

The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.

Setting up e-mail alerts

Configure the printer to send you e-mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings.

3 From the Other Settings menu, click E-mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e-mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.

Note: For information on setting up the e-mail server, contact your system support person.

Viewing reports

You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer, network, and supplies.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server

You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their end-of-life by setting the selectable alerts.

Notes:

• You can select alerts for toner cartridges, imaging kit, maintenance kit, and waste toner bottle.
• All alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all alerts can be set for the end-of-life supply condition. E-mail alert is available for all supply conditions.
• The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.

3 From the drop-down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:

Notification Description
Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E-mail Only	The printer generates an e-mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer shows	the warning message and generates an email about the status of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop^1	The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The user needs to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop^1,2	The printer stops when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be replaced to continue printing.
^1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled. ^2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.

4 Click Submit.

Modifying confidential print settings

Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.

3 Modify the settings:

• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified time, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.

4 Save the modified settings.

Copying printer settings to other printers

Note: This feature is available only in network printers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click the Copy Printer Settings.
3 To change the language, select a language from the drop-down menu, and then click Click here to submit language.
4 Click Printer Settings.
5 Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers in their appropriate fields.

Note: If you want to add or remove a target printer, then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP.

6 Click Copy Printer Settings.

Restoring factory default settings

If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings. For more information, see "Printing a menu settings page" on page 43.

If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All Settings option. For more information, see "Erasing non-volatile memory" on page 206.

Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.

From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >

Clearing jams

Avoiding jams

Load paper properly

•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.

Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper

• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

3D illustration of a printer with green internal compartments and a red downward arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols)

• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper

•Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
- Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
•Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.

Diagram illustrating three-step folding or retraction process of a device, showing hand positioning and red directional arrows indicating movement.

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
• Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
• Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam messages and locations

When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.

Note: When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, Auto does not guarantee that the page will print.

Exploded view diagram of a printer showing internal components with numbered labels

	Jam location Message	on the display What to do
1	Automatic document feeder (ADF)	[x]-page jam, open automatic feeder top cover [28y.xx]	Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then remove the jammed paper.
2	Standard bin	[x]-page jam, clear standard bin [203.xx]	Remove the jammed paper.
	Jam location Message on the display What to do
3	Fuser	[x]-page jam, open front door to clear fuser [202.xx]	Open the front door, then pull the tab and hold the fuser cover down, and then remove the jammed paper.
4	Front door	[x]-page jam, open front door [20y.xx]	Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper.
5	Duplex area	[x]-page jam, open front door to clear duplex [23y.xx]	Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper.
6	Tray [x]	[x]-page jam, open tray [x] [24y.xx]	Pull out the indicated tray, and then remove the jammed paper.
7	Multipurpose feeder	[x]-page jam, clear multipurpose feeder [250.xx]	Push the paper release lever to lift the paper rollers, and then remove the jammed paper.
8	Manual feeder	[x]-page jam, clear manual feeder [251.xx]	Remove the jammed paper.

[x]-page jam, clear standard bin [203.xx]

1 Open the top door.

Illustration of an HP printer with a magnified inset showing internal components (no text or symbols visible)

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Exterior view of a HP printer with open lid and colored paper strips (no visible text or symbols)

3 Open the front door.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with red arrows indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols visible)

a If there is a jammed paper under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out. Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure showing a paper feeding into a rack with red arrows indicating components (no text or symbols visible)

b Pull the green lever to open the fuser cover.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure showing paper feed, paper holder, and printer tray (no text or symbols visible)

c If there is a jammed paper in the fuser, then hold down the fuser cover, and then remove the paper. Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3D rendering of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a specific area (no text or symbols present)

4 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.

Diagram of a printer with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating process steps

5 Close the front door.

Diagram of a printer with red arrows indicating internal components (no text or symbols present)

6 From the printer control panel, touch √ to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press OK to confirm.

[x]-page jam, open front door to clear fuser [202.xx]

1 Open the front door.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and red arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols visible)

2 Open the top door.

Illustration of a printer with internal components and a magnified inset showing a warning symbol (no text or labels present)

3 Pull the green lever to open the fuser cover.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols visible)

4 Hold down the fuser cover, and then remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3D cutaway view of a printer internal structure showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a specific area (no text or symbols present)

5 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.

Diagram of a printer with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating process steps

6 Close the front door.

Diagram of a printer with red arrows indicating internal components (no text or symbols present)

7 From the printer control panel, touch √ to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press OK to confirm.

[x]-page jam, open front door [20y.xx]

1 Open the front door.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with red arrows indicating process direction (no text or symbols visible)

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure showing cooling fan and drive mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

3 Close the front door.

Diagram of a printer with red arrows indicating internal components (no text or symbols present)

4 From the printer control panel, touch √ to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press OK to confirm.

[x]-page jam, open front door to clear duplex [23y.xx]

1 Open the front door.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with red arrows indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols visible)

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols visible)

3 Close the front door.

Diagram of a printer with red arrows indicating internal components (no text or symbols present)

4 From the printer control panel, touch √ to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press OK to confirm.

[x]-page jam, open tray [x] [24y.xx]

1 Pull out the tray completely.

Note: The message on the printer display indicates the tray where the jammed paper is located.

Three-panel illustration of a printer's internal structure showing paper feed, paper holder, and printer tray (no text or symbols)

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Three-panel illustration of a printer printer with paper strips being inserted, showing red arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

3 Insert the tray.

4 From the printer control panel, touch √ to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press OK to confirm.

[x]-page jam, clear manual feeder [251.xx]

1 Pull out the standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) and manual feeder.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with green and black components, showing paper sheeting and a red arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Close-up of a printer with paper feed and red arrows indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols)

3 Insert the tray.

4 From the printer control panel, touch √ to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press OK to confirm.

[x]-page jam, clear multipurpose feeder [250.xx]

1 Push the paper release lever in the multipurpose feeder to access the jammed paper, and then gently pull out the paper.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Diagram showing printer paper processing with numbered callouts highlighting key components

2 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Three-step illustration showing a folding process: cutting, folding, and holding a flat sheet (no text or symbols)

3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.

Close-up of a printer printer with paper being inserted, showing paper layout and printer casing (no text or symbols visible)

4 Slide the paper guide until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper stack.

Diagram showing printer printing process with numbered annotations indicating steps 1 and 2

5 From the printer control panel, touch √ to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, select Next > OK > Clear the jam, press OK > OK

[x]-page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]

1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.

Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.

2 Open the ADF cover.

Interior view of a printer showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a process (no text or symbols present)

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Interior view of a printer showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols visible)

4 Close the ADF cover.

5 Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper guide.

6 From the printer control panel, touch √ to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, select Next > OK > Clear the jam, press OK > OK

Troubleshooting

Understanding the printer messages

Adjusting color

Wait for the process to complete.

Change [paper source] to [custom type name]

Try one or more of the following:

- Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then select Finished changing paper on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.

- Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom string]

Try one or more of the following:

- Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then select Finished changing paper on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.

- Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size]

Try one or more of the following:

- Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then select Finished changing paper on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.

- Cancel the print job.

Close door

Make sure the right side cover is installed, and then close the front and top doors to clear the message.

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]

Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.

Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying, faxing, or e-mailing.

- Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

[Color] cartridge low [88.xy]

You may need to order a toner cartridge. If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

[Color] cartridge nearly low [88.xy]

If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

[Color] cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]

You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User's Guide.

If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.
• Cancel the current print job. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.
  •Install additional printer memory.

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]

Held jobs are invalidated because of any of the following possible changes in the printer:

•The printer firmware has been updated.
•The tray for the print job is removed.

• The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer model.

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.

OK

Defective flash detected [51]

Try one or more of the following:

-Replace the defective flash memory card.
- From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.
- Cancel the current print job.

Disk full [62]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
  •Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.

Disk must be formatted for use in this device

From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.

Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.

An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.

An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.

Incompatible tray [x] [59]

Remove, and then reinstall the indicated tray to clear the message.

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size of paper in the tray.
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.
• Check the tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
• Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in the Printing Preferences or in the Print dialog.
• Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
• Make sure that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
• Cancel the print job.

Insert Tray [x]

Insert the indicated tray into the printer.

Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]

Try one or more of the following:

- From the printer control panel, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

- Delete fonts, macros, and other data from the printer memory.

•Install additional printer memory.

Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]

The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.

Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Insufficient memory to collate job [37]

Try one or more of the following:

- From the printer control panel, select Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

- Cancel the current print job.

Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]

Install additional printer memory or select Continue on the printer control panel to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]

Try one or more of the following:

- From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press

to confirm.

- Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.

Load [paper source] with [custom type name]

Try one or more of the following:

- Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

- To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.

- Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [custom string]

Try one or more of the following:

- Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

- To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.

- Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper size]

Try one or more of the following:

- Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.

- To use the tray or feeder with the correct paper size, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size, then it prints from the default paper source.

- Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper source.

- Cancel the current job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press OK on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press OK on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current job.

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press OK on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current job.

Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press OK on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current job.

Maintenance kit low [80.xy]

You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]

For more information, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]

You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.

If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Memory full [38]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, select Cancel job to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press
  OK to confirm.
  •Install additional printer memory.

Network [x] software error [54]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press
  OK to confirm.

- Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

- Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]

Try one or more of the following:

- From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

- Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.

- Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.

Note: Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.

Non-Lexmark [color] [supply type], see User's Guide [33.xy]

Note: The supply type can be toner cartridge or the imaging kit.

The printer has detected a non-Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.

All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.

To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, press and hold ✗ and the # button on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK and ✗ simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue printing.

If you do not wish to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install a genuine Lexmark supply or part.

Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive [color] cartridge [31.xy]

Try one or more of the following:

• Install the missing toner cartridge. For more information, see the "Replacing supplies" section of the User's Guide.
• Remove the unresponsive cartridge, and then reinstall it.

Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge may be defective. Replace the cartridge.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive [type] imaging kit [31.xy]

Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.

Try one or more of the following:

• Install the missing imaging kit. For more information, see the "Replacing supplies" section of the User's Guide.
• Remove the unresponsive imaging kit, and then reinstall it.

Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging kit may be defective. Replace the imaging kit.

Reload printed pages in Tray [x]

Try any of the following:

- From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing the second side of the sheet. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

- Cancel the print job.

Remove packaging material, [area name]

1 Remove any remaining packing material from the indicated location.

2 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Remove paper from standard output bin

Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.

Replace [color] cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]

Replace the indicated toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the "Ordering supplies" section of the User's Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace [color] cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]

Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:

Region number Region
0	G	I	o	b	a	I
1 United States, Canada
2 European Union (EU), European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
8 Rest of the world
9	I	n	v	a	I	i d

Notes:

• The x and y values represent .xy in the error code that appears on the printer control panel.
  •The x and y values must match for printing to continue.

Replace [type] imaging kit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]

Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.

Replace the indicated imaging kit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace all originals if restarting job.

Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Remove defective disk [61]

Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.

Replace defective [color] cartridge [31.xy]

Replace the defective toner cartridge to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Note: If you do not have a replacement toner cartridge, then see the "Ordering supplies" section of the User's Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace defective [type] imaging kit [31.xy]

Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.

Replace the defective imaging kit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace jammed originals if restarting job.

Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]

Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative, and then report the message. The printer is scheduled for maintenance.

Replace missing [color] cartridge [31.xy]

Install the indicated toner cartridge to clear the message. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

Replace missing [type] imaging kit [31.xy]

Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.

Install the indicated imaging kit to clear the message. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User's Guide.

Replace missing waste toner bottle [82.xy]

Install the missing waste toner bottle to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Replace unsupported [color] cartridge [32.xy]

Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message.

Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace unsupported [type] imaging kit [32.xy]

Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.

Remove the indicated imaging kit, and then install a supported one to clear the message.

Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace waste toner bottle [82.xy]

Replace the waste toner bottle to clear the message.

Restore held jobs?

Try one or more of the following:

• Select Restore on the printer control panel to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.
• Select Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Scanner automatic feeder cover open

Close the ADF cover.

Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]

Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]

From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:

• Select Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
• Select Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.

Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.

- For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]

Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]

Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Some held jobs were not restored

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.

OK

Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.

SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.

From the printer control panel, press to clear the message.

Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Standard network software error [54]

Try one or more of the following:

- From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press

OK to confirm.

• Turn off the printer and then turn it back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.

Standard USB port disabled [56]

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.

OK

Notes:

• The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
  • Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

Supply needed to complete job

Try one or more of the following:

- From the printer control panel, touch Prompt for supplies to view all error messages that indicate what supplies are needed to continue processing the current job. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to clear the message and continue printing.

1 Order the missing supply immediately.
2 Install the supply. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

- Cancel the print job, then install the missing supply, and then resend the print job.

Too many flash options installed [58]

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

Too many trays attached [58]

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.

4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

5 Turn the printer back on.

[Type] imaging kit low [84.xy]

Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.

You may need to order an imaging kit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

[Type] imaging kit nearly low [84.xy]

Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.

If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For

non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

[Type] imaging kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]

Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.

You may need to replace the imaging kit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User's Guide.

If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Unformatted flash detected [53]

Try one or more of the following:

- From the printer control, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

- Format the flash memory.

Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and need to be replaced.

Waste toner bottle nearly full [82.xy]

You may need to order a waste toner bottle. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press OK to confirm.

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.

From the printer control panel, press to clear the message.

Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Solving printer problems

• "Basic printer problems" on page 269
• "Option problems" on page 271
• "Paper feed problems" on page 273

Basic printer problems

The printer is not responding

Action Yes No
Step 1Make sure the printer is turned on.Is the printer turned on?	Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?	Press the Sleep button to wake the printer from Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?	Go to step 4. Plug one end of the power cord into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Step 4Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.Does other electrical equipment work?	Unplug the other electrical equipment, and then turn on the printer. If the printer does not work, then reconnect the other electrical equipment.	Go to step 5.
Step 5Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted in the correct ports.Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?	Go to step 6. Make sure to match the following:•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer•The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port
Step 6Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?	Turn on the switch or reset the breaker.	Go to step 7.
Step 7Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords?	Connect the printer power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet.	Go to step 8.
Step 8Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network device.Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device?	Go to step 9. Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Step 9Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing material.Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material removed?	Go to step 10. Turn off the printer, remove all packing materials, then reinstall the hardware options, and then turn on the printer.
Step 10Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.Are the port settings correct?	Go to step 11. Use correct printer driver settings.
Step 11Check the installed printer driver.Is the correct printer driver installed?	Go to step 12. Install the correct printer driver.
Step 12Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.Is the printer working?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Printer display is blank

Action Yes No
Step 1Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.Does Ready appear on the printer display?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?	The problem is solved. Turn off the printer, and then contact customer support.

Option problems

Cannot detect internal option

Action Yes No
Step 1Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer.Does the internal option operate correctly?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.a Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector in the controller board.c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?	Go to step 3. Connect the internal option to the controller board.
Step 3Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is listed in the Installed Features list.Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?	Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal option.
Step 4a Check if the internal option is selected.It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 37.b Resend the print job.Does the internal option operate correctly?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Cannot detect memory card

Action Yes No
Make sure the memory card is installed.a Install the memory card. For more information, see “Installing a memory card” on page 29.Note:Check if the memory card is securely connected to the printer controller board.b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the card is listed in the Installed Options list.Is the card listed in the Installed Options list?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Tray problems

Action Yes No
Step 1a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:Check for paper jams or misfeeds.Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.If you are printing on custom-size paper, then make sure that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.b Check if the tray closes properly.Is the tray working?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2a Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.b Resend the print job.Is the tray working?	The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the Installed Features list.Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?	Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the tray.
Step 4Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 37.Is the tray available in the printer driver?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Paper feed problems

Jammed pages are not reprinted

Action Yes No
Turn on Jam Recovery.a From the home screen, navigate to: [IMAGE] > Settings > General Settings > Print Recoveryb From the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On or Auto.c Touch Submit.Do pages reprint after a jam?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Paper frequently jams

Action Yes No
Step 1a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.b Insert the tray properly.If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint automatically.Do paper jams still occur frequently?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a Load paper from a fresh package.Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Do paper jams still occur frequently?	Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3a Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 239.b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.Do paper jams still occur frequently?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared

Action Yes No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.a Remove any jammed paper.b From the printer control panel, touchContinueto clear the message.Does the paper jam message remain?	Contactcustomer support.	The problem is solved.

Solving print problems

Printing problems

Confidential and other held jobs do not print

Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.

Action Yes No
Step 1Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your print job is listed.Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?	Go to step 2. Select one	of the Print and Hold options, and then resend the print job. For more information, see “Printing confidential and other held jobs” on page 69.
Step 2The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.•Delete the print job, and then send it again.•For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.For Windows usersa Open the Print Properties folder.b From the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate documents” check box.c Enter a PIN number.For Macintosh usersSave each print job, name each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the printer.Does the job print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs.Does the job print?	The problem is solved.	Add additional printer memory.

Error message about reading the flash drive appears

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB port.Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?	Go to step 2. Insert the	flash driveinto the front USB port.
Step 2Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green.Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.Is the indicator light blinking green?	Wait until the printer is ready, then view the held jobs list, and then print the documents.	Go to step 3.
Step 3a Check for an error message on the display.b Clear the message.Does the error message still appear?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4Check if the flash drive is supported.For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see “Supported flash drives and file types” on page 67.Does the error message still appear?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.Does the error message still appear?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Incorrect characters print

Action Yes No
Step 1Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?	Deactivate Hex Trace mode.	Go to step 2.
Step 2a From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.b Resend the print job.Do incorrect characters print?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

Action Yes No
Step 1a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.b Resend the print job.Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.b Resend the print job.Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?	The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.b Resend the print job.Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?	The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4a Check if the trays are not linked.b Resend the print job.Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Large jobs do not collate

Action Yes No
Step 1a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).b Resend the print job.Did the job print and collate correctly?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2a From the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.b Resend the print job.Did the job print and collate correctly?	The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.Did the job print and collate correctly?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Multiple-language PDF files do not print

Action Yes No
Step 1a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe Acrobat.b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.Do the files print?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.Do the files print?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Printing slows down

Notes:

• When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
• The printer speed may be reduced if printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated temperatures.

Action Yes No
Place letter- or A4-size paper in the tray, and then resend the print job.Does the print speed increase?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Print jobs do not print

Action Yes No
Step 1a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and check if you have selected the correct printer.Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select the printer for each document that you want to print.b Resend the print job.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears on the printer display.b Resend the print job.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.b Resend the print job.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Step 5a Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.b Resend the print job.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 6a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 37.Note: The printer software is available at http://support.lexmark.com.b Resend the print job.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Print job takes longer than expected

Action Yes No
Step 1Change the environmental settings of the printer.a From the printer control panel, navigate to:Settings > General Settingsb Select Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the consumption of energy or supplies, or both.Did the job print?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the jobDid the job print?	The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.b Resend the print job.Did the job print?	The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4a Disable the Page Protect feature.From the printer control panel, navigate to:Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Offb Resend the print job.Did the job print?	The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Step 5a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.b Resend the print job.Did the job print?	The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 6Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.Did the job print?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Tray linking does not work

Notes:

•The trays can detect paper length.
- The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Action Yes No
Step 1a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size and type.Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in each tray.Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.b Resend the print job.Do the trays link correctly?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.b Resend the print job.Do the trays link correctly?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Unexpected page breaks occur

Action Yes No
Increase the printing timeout.a From the home screen, navigate to:> Settings > General Settings > Timeoutsb Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.c Resend the print job.Did the file print correctly?	The problem is solved.	Check the original file for manual page breaks.

Print quality problems

Characters have jagged or uneven edges

ABC DEF

Action Yes No
Step 1a Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported by the printer.1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:Menus > Reports > Print Fonts2 Select PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.b Resend the print job.Are you using fonts that are supported by the printer?	Go to step 2. Select a font that is supported by the printer.
Step 2Check if the fonts installed on the computer are supported by the printer.Are the fonts installed on the computer supported by the printer?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Clipped pages or images

ABCD ABCD ABCD

Leading edge Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper loaded.b Resend the print job.Is the page or image clipped?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?	Go to step 3. Do one or	more of the following:•From the printer control panel, change the paper size to match the paper loaded in the tray.•From the printer control panel, change the paper type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Is the page or image clipped?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.b Resend the print job.Is the page or image clipped?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Gray background on prints

Action Yes No
Step 1Reduce the toner darkness.aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner density.Note:4 is the factory default setting.bResend the print job.Did the gray background disappear?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.Warning—Potential Damage:Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.Warning—Potential Damage:Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.bResend the print job.Did the gray background disappear?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Horizontal voids appear on prints

Leading edge Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.b Resend the print job.Do horizontal voids appear on prints?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.b Resend the print job.Do horizontal voids appear on prints?	Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.b Resend the print job.Do horizontal voids appear on prints?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Do horizontal voids appear on prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Incorrect margins on prints

ABCD ABCD ABCD

Action Yes No
Step 1a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.b Resend the print job.Are the margins correct?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?	Go to step 3. Do one or more of the following:Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Are the margins correct?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Paper curl

Action Yes No
Step 1Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded.Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?	Go to step 2. Adjust the	width and length guides.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray?	Go to step 3. Specify the	paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Is the paper still curled?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.b Resend the print job.Is the paper still curled?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5a Load paper from a fresh package.Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Is the paper still curled?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Print irregularities

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Leading edge Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.b Resend the print job.Do print irregularities still appear?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Is the tray set to the size and type of the paper loaded in the tray?	Go to step 3. Do one or more of the following:Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Do print irregularities still appear?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.Are you printing on textured or rough paper?	From the printer control panel, set the paper texture in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.	Go to step 5.
Step 5a Load paper from a fresh package.Note:Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Do print irregularities still appear?	Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
Step 6Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Do print irregularities still appear?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Print is too dark

ABC DEF

Action Yes No
Step 1a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, selectColor Adjust.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too dark?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner darkness.Note: 4 is the factory default setting.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too dark?	Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3a From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.b Resend the print job.Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?	Go to step 4. Change the paperloaded in the tray to match the paper type, texture, and weight specified in the tray settings.
Step 4a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too dark?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.Are you printing on textured or rough paper?	From the printer control panel, set the paper texture in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded on the tray.	Go to step 6.
Step 6a Load paper from a fresh package.Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too dark?	Go to step 7. The problem is solved.
Step 7Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Is the print still too dark?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Print is too light

ABC DEF

Action Yes No
Step 1a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, selectColor Adjust.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too light?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner darkness.Note:4 is the factory default setting.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too light?	Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?	Go to step 4. Specify the	paper type, texture, and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 4a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too light?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.Are you printing on textured or rough paper?	From the printer control panel, set the paper texture in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray	Go to step 5.
Step 6a Load paper from a fresh package.Note:Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too light?	Go to step 7. The problem is solved.
Step 7Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Is the print still too light?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Printer is printing blank pages

Blank white document page with a small corner detail (no text or symbols)

Action Yes No
Step 1a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging kit.1 Remove the imaging kit.2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging kit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.3 Reinstall the imaging kit.b Resend the print job.Is the printer still printing blank pages?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Is the printer still printing blank pages?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Printer is printing solid black pages

Solid black document page with a white corner detail (no text or symbols)

Action Yes No
Step 1a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.b Resend the print job.Is the printer printing solid black pages?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Is the printer printing solid black pages?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Repeating defects appear on prints

) ) ) )

Action Yes No
Step 1Measure the distance between the defects.Check for a distance between the defects that equals:25.1 mm (0.98 in.)29.8 mm (1.17 in.)43.9 mm (1.72 in.)45.5 mm (1.79 in.)94.2 mm (3.70 in.)Is the distance between defects equal to one of the listed measurements?	Go to step 2.	1 Check if the distance between the defects is equal to one of the following:37.7 mm (1.48 in.)78.5 mm (3.09 in.)95 mm (3.74 in.)2 Take note of the distance, and then contact customer support at http://support.le xmark.com or your service representative.
Step 2Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Do the repeating defects still appear?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Shadow images appear on prints

ABCD ABCD

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if the paper loaded in the tray has the correct paper type and weight.Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?	Go to step 2. Load paper	with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded?	Go to step 3. Change the paper typeand weight to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Do shadow images still appear on prints?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Do shadow images still appear on prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Skewed print

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Action Yes No
Step 1a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded.b Resend the print job.Is the print still skewed?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.b Resend the print job.Is the print still skewed?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Action Yes No
Step 1a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Do the paper type and weight match the paper in the tray?	Go to step 3. Do one or more of the following:Specify the paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type and weight specified in the tray settings.
Step 3a Load paper from a fresh package.Note:Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.b Resend the print job.Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Streaked vertical lines appear on prints

Action Yes No
Step 1a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?	Go to step 3. Do one or more of the following:Specify the paper texture, type, and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings.
Step 3a Load paper from a fresh package.Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.b Resend the print job.Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Toner fog or background shading appears on prints

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Action Yes No
Step 1a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.b Resend the print job.Does fog or shading disappear from the prints?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Does fog or shading disappear from the prints?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Toner rubs off

ABC DEF Leading edge Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type and weight.Do the paper type and texture match the paper loaded in the tray?	Go to step 2. Specify the paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 2Check if you are printing on paper with texture or rough finishes.Are you printing on textured or rough paper?	From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper texture.	Contact customer support.

Toner specks appear on prints

Action Yes No
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Do toner specks appear on prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Transparency print quality is poor

Action Yes No
Step 1From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?	Go to step 2. Set the paper type to Transparency.
Step 2a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency.b Resend the print job.Is the print quality still poor?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Uneven print density

ABCDE ABCDE

Action Yes No
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Is the print density uneven?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Vertical voids appear on prints

Leading edge Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1a Check if your software program is using a correct fill pattern.b Resend the print job.Do vertical voids appear on prints?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a From the Paper Menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type and paper weight.b Resend the print job.Do vertical voids appear on prints?	Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.a Load paper source with a recommended type of paper.b Resend the print job.Do vertical voids appear on prints?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.b Resend the print job.Do vertical voids appear on prints?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.Do vertical voids appear on prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Color quality problems

FAQ about color printing

What is RGB color?

Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue needed to produce a certain color.

What is CMYK color?

Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers, and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.

How is color specified in a document to be printed?

Software programs typically specify the document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they let users modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the help information of your operating system.

How does the printer know what color to print?

When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the color you want. The object information determines the application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.

What is manual color correction?

When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user-selected color conversion tables to process objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user-defined color conversion will be implemented. Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).

Notes:

• Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors.
• When Auto Color Correction is selected, the color conversion tables will generate preferred colors used for the majority of the documents.

To manually apply a different color conversion table, do the following:

1 From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2 From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type.

Object type Color conversion tables
RGB ImageRGB TextRGB Graphics	Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied to all incoming color formats.sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor.Note: Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs.Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor. This uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray.sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB Display color correction.Note: Black toner usage is optimized for printing business graphics.Off—No color correction is implemented.
CMYK ImageCMYK TextCMYK Graphics	US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate Euroscale color output.Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction setting.Off—No color correction is implemented.

How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?

Nine types of Color Samples sets are available from the Quality menu on the printer control panel. These are also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple-page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.

By examining Color Samples sets, you can identify the box whose color is the closest to the color you want. The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For more information, see the help information of your operating system.

Note: Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object.

Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color-matching problem depends on the Color Correction setting being used, the type of object being printed, and how the color of the object is specified in the software program. When Color Correction is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information, and no color conversion is implemented.

Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.

Prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected

Note: This problem occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended.

Action Yes No
Step 1From the printer control panel, make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency.Is the paper type setting correct?	Go to step 2. Set the paper type to Transparency.
Step 2Reduce the toner darkness, and then resend the print job.Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?	The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3Make sure you are using a recommended type of color transparency, and then resend the print job.Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

The color of the print does not match the color of the original file

Note: The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions.

Action Yes No
Step 1a Set Color Correction to Off.Note:When the printer color correction is disabled, the color is based on the print job information, and no color conversion is implemented.b Resend the print job.Does the color of the print match the color of the file on the computer screen?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, do the following:a Select Color Correction, and then select Manual.b Select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type.c Resend the print job.Does the color of the print match the color of the file on the computer screen?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

The print appears tinted

Action Yes No
Adjust the color balance.aFrom the Color Balance menu on the printer control panel, increase or decrease the values for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.bResend the print job.Does the print still appear tinted?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Solving copy problems

• "Copier does not respond" on page 303

• "Scanner unit does not close" on page 303
  • "Poor copy quality" on page 304
• "Partial document or photo copies" on page 305

Copier does not respond

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if an error or status message appears on the display.Does an error or status message appear?	Clear the error or status message.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?	Go to step 3. Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Step 3Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back on.Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Scanner unit does not close

Action Yes No
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the printer.a Lift the scanner unit.b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.c Lower the scanner unit.Did the scanner unit close properly?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Poor copy quality

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if an error or status message appears on the display.Does an error or status message appear?	Clear the error or status message.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Check the quality of the original document.Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?	Go to step 3. Increase the scan resolution setting for a higher-quality output.
Step 3If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.Is the scanner glass clean?	Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 210.
Step 4Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.a From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco-Mode settings.b From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.c If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.Is the print quality satisfactory?	Go to step 5. See “Print quality problems” on page 282.
Step 5Check the placement of the document or photo.Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.Is the document or photo loaded correctly?	Go to step 6. Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Step 6Check the copy settings.From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned?	Go to step 7. Change the Content Type and Content Source settings to match the document being scanned.
Step 7Check for patterns on print.a From the printer control panel, navigate to:Copy >Sharpness >select a lower settingNote: Make sure no scaling is being selected.b Resend the copy job.Do patterns appear on prints?	Go to step 8. The problem is solved.
Step 8Check for missing or faded text on prints.a From the Copy screen, adjust the settings of the following:•Sharpness—Increase the sharpness setting.•Contrast—Increase the contrast setting.b Resend the copy job.Do prints have missing or faded text?	Go to step 9. The problem is solved.
Step 9Check for washed-out or overexposed output.a From the Copy screen, adjust the settings of the following:•Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.•Darkness—Increase the current setting.b Resend the copy job.Do pages show washed-out or overexposed prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Partial document or photo copies

Action Yes No
Step 1Check the placement of the document or photo.Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.Is the document or photo loaded correctly?	Go to step 2. Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Step 2Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the tray.From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting.Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.	Go to step 3. Change the paper size setting to match the paper loaded in the tray, or load the tray with paper that matches the paper size setting.
Step 3a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Do copies print properly?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Solving fax problems

Caller ID is not shown

Action Yes No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.Notes:If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns.Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.Does the caller ID appear?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Cannot send or receive a fax

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if an error or status message appears on the display.Is there an error or status message on the display?	Clear the error or status message.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?	Go to step 3. Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Step 3Check the power.Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears on the display.Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?	Go to step 4. Turn on the printer,and then wait until Ready appears on the display.
Step 4Check the printer connections.If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following equipment are secure:TelephoneHandsetAnswering machineAre the cable connections secure?	Go to step 5. Securely connect the cables.
Step 5a Check the telephone wall jack.1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.2 Listen for a dial tone.3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable into the wall jack.4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable into a different wall jack.5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.b Try sending or receiving a fax.Can you send or receive a fax?	The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 6Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector.The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL provider.If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector?	Go to step 7. Connect the printer to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector.
Step 7Check for a dial tone.Did you hear a dial tone?	Go to step 8.	Try calling the fax number to make sure that it is working properly.If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax.If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to check if you hear a dial tone.
Step 8Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.Can you send or receive a fax?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 9.
Step 9a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.b Try sending or receiving a fax.Can you send or receive a fax?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 10.
Step 10a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact your telephone company.Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.b Try sending or receiving a fax.Can you send or receive a fax?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 11.
Step 11Scan the original document one page at a time.a Dial the fax number.b Scan the document one page at a time.Can you send or receive a fax?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Can send but not receive faxes

Action Yes No
Step 1Check the tray or feeder.If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.Can you receive faxes?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2Check the ring count delay settings.a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.Notes:View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.d Click Submit.Can you receive faxes?	The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.Can you receive faxes?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Can receive but not send faxes

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if the printer is in Fax mode.From the home screen, touchFaxto put the printer in Fax mode, and then send the fax.Note:The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type.To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.Can you send faxes?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2Load the original document properly.Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.Can you send faxes?	The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3Set up the shortcut number properly.•Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number that you want to dial.•Dial the telephone number manually.Can you send faxes?	The problem is solved. Contact customersupport.

Fax and e-mail functions are not set up

Notes:

• Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
• The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e-mail.

Action Yes No
a From the home screen, navigate to: [IMAGE] > Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes > Submitb Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.c Select a language, and then touch .d Select a country or region, and then touch Next.e Select a time zone, and then touch Next.f Select Fax and E-mail, and then touch Next.Are fax and e-mail functions set up?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Received fax has poor print quality

Action Yes No
Step 1Ask the person who sent you the fax to:a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.b Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.c Resend the fax.Is the fax print quality satisfactory?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.Notes:View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.c In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:2400480096001440033600d Click Submit, and then resend the fax.Is the fax print quality satisfactory?	The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3Replace the toner cartridge.When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge, and then resend the fax.Is the fax print quality satisfactory?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Solving scanner problems

• "The scanner does not respond" on page 312
- "Scan job was not successful" on page 313
- "Scanner unit does not close" on page 313

• "Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer" on page 314
• "Poor scanned image quality" on page 314
• "Partial document or photo scans" on page 315
• "Cannot scan from a computer" on page 315

The scanner does not respond

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if the printer is turned on.Is the printer turned on?	Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device?	Go to step 3. Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Step 3Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?	Go to step 4. Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Step 4Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?	Turn on the switch or reset the breaker.	Go to step 5.
Step 5Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords?	Connect the printer power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet.	Go to step 6.
Step 6Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.Are the other electrical equipment working?	Unplug the other electrical equipment and turn on the printer. If the printer does not work, then reconnect the other electrical equipment and then go to step 6.	Go to step 7.
Step 7Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.Are the printer and scanner working?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Scan job was not successful

Action Yes No
Step 1Check the cable connections.Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.Are the cables securely connected?	Go to step 2. Connect the cables properly.
Step 2Check if the file name is already in use.Is the file name already in use?	Change the file name. Go to step 3.
Step 3Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another application or being used by another user.Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?	Close the file you are scanning.	Go to step 4.
Step 4Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings.Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected in the destination configuration settings?	Contact customer support.	Select the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box in the destination configuration settings.

Scanner unit does not close

Action Yes No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.a Lift the scanner unit.b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.c Lower the scanner unit.Did the scanner unit close correctly?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.Close all applications that are not being used.Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2Select a lower scan resolution.Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Poor scanned image quality

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if an error message appears on the display.Is there an error message on the printer display?	Clear the error message.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Check the quality of the original document.Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?	Go to step 3. Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher-quality output.
Step 3Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.Is the scanner glass clean?	Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 210.
Step 4Check the placement of the document or photo.Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.Is the document or photo loaded correctly?	Go to step 5. Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Step 5Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.• From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco-Mode settings.•From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.•When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.Is the print quality satisfactory?	Go to step 6. See “Print quality problems” on page 282.
Step 6Check the scan settings.From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned?	Go to step 7. Change the ContentType and ContentSource settings to match the document being scanned.
Step 7Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher-quality output.Did the increased resolution produce a higher-quality output?	Problem solved. Contactcustomersupport.

Partial document or photo scans

Action Yes No
Check the placement of the document or photo.Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.Is the document or photo loaded correctly?	Contact customer support.	Load the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Cannot scan from a computer

Action Yes No
Step 1Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer display before scanning a job.Does Ready appear before scanning the job?	Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Step 2Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.Is there an error message on the printer display?	Clear the error message.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to make sure they are secure.For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server secure?	Contact customer support.	Tighten the cable connections.

Solving home screen applications problems

- "An application error has occurred" on page 316

An application error has occurred

Action Yes No
Step 1Check the system log for relevant details.a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:View the IP address on the printer home screen.Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.b Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.c From the Filter menu, select an application status.d From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.Does an error message appear in the log?	Go to step 2. Contact	customersupport.
Step 2Resolve the error.Is the application working now?	The problem is solved. Contactsupport.

Embedded Web Server does not open

Action Yes No
Step 1a Turn on the printer.b Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.c Press Enter.Does the Embedded Web Server open?	The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2Make sure the printer IP address is correct.a View the printer IP address:From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menuBy printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP sectionNote: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.b Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address.Note: Depending on the network settings, you may need to type "https://" instead of "http://" before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server.c Press Enter.Does the Embedded Web Server open?	The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3Check if the network is working.Print a network setup page.Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected.Note: If the status is Not Connected, then the connection may be intermittent, or the network cable may be defective. Contact your system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.Press Enter.Does the Embedded Web Server open?	The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.Connect the cables properly. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.Press Enter.Does the Embedded Web Server open?	The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Step 5Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.Does the Embedded Web Server open?	The problem is solved. Contact your system support person.

Contacting customer support

When you contact customer support, you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the printer display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.

You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label at the back of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.

Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com, and then select one of the following:

Tech Library	You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you solve common problems.
E-mail	You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem.
Live chat	You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product.

Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit http://support.lexmark.com.

Notices

Product information

Product name:

Lexmark CX410e and Lexmark CX410de

Machine type:

7527

Model(s):

415, 436

Edition notice

July 2012

The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.

References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user's responsibility.

For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.

For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.

© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.

All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT END USERS

The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

Licensing notices

All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.

Trademarks

Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.

Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company's designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.

The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:

Albertus The Monotype	Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur	Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa	International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery	International Typeface Corporation
Joanna	The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold	Arthur Baker
Monaco	Apple Computer, Inc.
New York	Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford	Arthur Baker
Palatino	Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond	Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Taffy Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 48 dBA
Scanning 45 dBA
Copying 50 dBA
Ready 32 dBA

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

Prohibition sign showing a trash bin crossed out by red 'X' symbols, indicating no waste or disposal.

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.

If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.

Product disposal

Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options.

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer.

ENERGY STAR

Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

Temperature information

Ambient temperature 16 to 32°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping and storage temperature -40 to 43°C (-40 to 110°F)

Laser notice

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label

A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:

DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and Interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.

PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.

Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.

NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována poljstka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.

FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.

GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.

DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.

VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersätellyä on varottava, kun värlkasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.

GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.

KINDYNOZ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.

VESZÉLY - Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.

PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l'esposizione al raggio laser.

FARE - Usynlig laserstråling när kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.

NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanle laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.

ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.

Pozor - Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žlarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.

PEUGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.

FARA - Osynlig laserstråling när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphávd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.

危険 - 当移除碳粉盒及互鎖失效时会产生看不见的激光輻射, 请避免暴露在激光光束下。

危険 - 移除碳粉回與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不见的需射輻射。請避免曝露在需射光束下。

危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。

Power consumption

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Printing	The product is generating hard-copy output from electronic inputs.	600 W
Copy	The product is generating hard-copy output from hard-copy original documents.	640 W
Scan The product is scanning hard-copy documents. 65 W
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 40 W
Sleep Mode	The product is in a high-level energy-saving mode.	7 W
Hibernate	The product is in a low-level energy-saving mode.	0.5 W
Off	The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned off.	0 W

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Sleep Mode

This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.

Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 30 minutes

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Hibernate Mode

This product is designed with an ultra-low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:

• Using the Hibernate Timeout
•Using the Schedule Power modes
•Using the Sleep/Hibernate button

Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions except for EU countries and Switzerland	N/A
Factory default value for this product in EU countries or regions and Switzerland 3 days

The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between one hour and one month.

Off mode

If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Regulatory notices for electromagnetic compatibility

This section contains regulatory information pertaining to electromagnetic compatibility.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.

The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.

Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:

Director of Lexmark Technology & Services

Lexmark International, Inc.

740 West New Circle Road

Lexington, KY 40550

[phone]

Industry Canada compliance statement

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard ICES-003.

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy-related products.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment

This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone company.

This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises' wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)

See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Industry Canada (Canada)

This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada.

To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.

The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.

The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

Industry Canada (Canada)

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network

The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.

This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.

This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.

This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.

Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:

• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

Using this product in Switzerland

This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland.

Notice to Users in the European Union

Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

CE

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.

Regulatory notices for wireless products

This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters, for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Modular component notice

This product may contain the following modular component(s):

Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M01-005, FCC ID: IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Notice to users in the European Union

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

CE

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.

AT BE BG CH	CY CZ DE DK	EE
EL ES FI FR HR	HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT	NL	NO	PL PT
RO	SE SI SK TR UK

Česky	Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk	Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch	Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Ελληνική	ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η ΛΕΧΜΑΡΚ ΙΝΤΕΝΑΤΙΟΝΑΛ, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English	Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español	Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti	Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi	Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français	Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Aluli	rott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvető követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb előírásainak.
Íslenska Hér	með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con	la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski	Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių	Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti	Bil-preženti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands	Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk	Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski	Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A	Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky	Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko	Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Här	med intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS, LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-specific warranty information that came with your product.

This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty

Lexmark warrants that this product:

—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship

If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).

If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the product.

If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user.

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.

When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.

The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.

Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.

As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.

Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).

For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.

Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product.

Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:

—Modification or unauthorized attachments

—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user's guides, manuals, instructions or guidance

—Unsuitable physical or operating environment

—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Limitation of liability

Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.

Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.

This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights

Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.

This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Index

Numerics

250-sheet tray loading 44

550-sheet tray installing 33 loading 44

650-sheet duo tray installing 33 loading 44, 48

Symbols

[Color] cartridge low [88.xy] 256

[Color] cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 256

[Color] cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy] 256

[Type] imaging kit low [84.xy] 268

[Type] imaging kit nearly low [84.xy] 268

[Type] imaging kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy] 268

[x]-page jam, open front door [20y.xx] 247

[x]-page jam, open front door to clear fuser [202.xx] 244

[x]-page jam, clear manual feeder [251.xx] 251

[x]-page jam, clear multipurpose feeder [250.xx] 251

[x]-page jam, clear standard bin [203.xx] 241

[x]-page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 253

[x]-page jam, open front door to clear duplex [23y.xx] 248

[x]-page jam, open tray [x] [24y.xx] 249

A

accessing the Embedded Web Server 19

Active NIC menu 133 adapter plug 100

ADF copying using 72

adjusting brightness

Embedded Web Server 202

printer control panel 202

Adjusting color 255

adjusting copy quality 77

adjusting display brightness 202

adjusting Sleep mode 200

adjusting toner darkness 65

administrator settings Embedded Web Server 235

advanced duplex copy options 82

advanced imaging

copy options 83

e-mail options 90

fax options 113

scan screen 120

answering machine setting up 93

AppleTalk menu 138

applications understanding 19

attaching cables 35

available internal options 26

avoiding jams 59

avoiding paper jams 239

B

black-and-white printing 64

blocking junk faxes 109

buttons, touch screen using 16

C

cables

Ethernet 35

USB 35

cancel button

printer control panel 14

canceling

print job, from computer 71

canceling a copy job 80

canceling a print job

from a computer 71

from the printer control panel 70

canceling an e-mail 88

cannot open Embedded Web

Server 316

Card Copy

setting up 21

card stock

loading 49

tips 57

Change [paper source] to [custom string] 255

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] 255

Change [paper source] to [paper

type] [paper size] 255

checking an unresponsive printer 269

checking status of parts and

supplies 211

checking the status of parts and

supplies 211

checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 235

cleaning

exterior of the printer 209

interior of the printer 209

scanner glass 210

cleaning the printer 209

clear all / reset button printer control panel 14

Close door 255

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job

[2yy.xx] 256

collate

copy options 81

collating copies 78

color quality troubleshooting

color of print and color on computer screen do not match 302

prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected 301

color quality, troubleshooting print appears tinted 302

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39] 256

confidential data

information on securing 208

confidential jobs

modifying print settings 69, 237

confidential print jobs 68

printing from a Macintosh computer 69

printing from Windows 69

Confidential Print menu 142

Configuration change, some held

jobs were not restored [57] 256

configuration information

wireless network 40

configurations

printer 11

configuring

multiple printers 237

supply notifications, imaging kit 236

supply notifications, maintenance kit 236

supply notifications, toner cartridge 236

supply notifications, waste toner bottle 236

configuring supply notifications

from the Embedded Web

Server 236

connecting printer to distinctive

ring service 104

connecting to a wireless network

using PIN (Personal Identification Number) method 41

using Push Button Configuration method 41

using the Embedded Web Server 42

using wireless setup wizard 41

conservation settings

brightness, adjusting 202

Eco-Mode 199

Hibernate Mode 201

Hibernate Timeout 201

Quiet Mode 199

Schedule Power Modes 202

Sleep Mode 200

conserving supplies 198

contacting customer support 318

content

e-mail settings 89

content source

e-mail settings 89

fax options 112

content type

e-mail settings 89

fax options 112

control panel, printer

indicator light 16

Sleep button light 16

controller board

accessing 27

copies

copy options 81

copy job, canceling

using the ADF 80

using the scanner glass 80

copy options

advanced duplex 82

advanced imaging 83

collate 81

copies 81

cover page setup 83

create booklet 83

custom job 83

darkness 81

header/footer 83

overlay 83

paper saver 83

Save As Shortcut 82

separator sheets 83

sides (duplex) 81

copy quality

adjusting 77

copy screen

content source 82

content type 82

options 81, 82

Copy Settings menu 154

copy troubleshooting

copier does not respond 303

partial document or photo copies 305

poor copy quality 304

poor scanned image quality 314

scanner unit does not close 303, 313

copying

adding an overlay message 80

adjusting quality 77

canceling a copy job 80

collating copies 78

creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 74

different paper sizes 75

enlarging 76

inserting a header or footer 79

multiple pages on one sheet 79

on both sides of the paper (duplexing) 76

on letterhead 74

on transparencies 73

photos 73

placing separator sheets between copies 78

quick copy 72

reducing 76

selecting a tray 75

to a different size 74

using the ADF 72

using the scanner glass 73

copying different paper sizes 75

copying multiple pages on one sheet 79

copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing) 76

copying on letterhead 74

copying on transparencies 73

cover page setup copy options 83

create booklet

copy options 83

creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 108

creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 114

creating custom name paper type 52

custom job

copy options 83

e-mail options 90

fax options 113

scan options 120

custom name configuring !

Custom Names menu 131

custom paper type name assigning 53

Custom Scan Sizes menu 131

Custom Type [x]

changing paper type 53

creating custom name 52

Custom Types menu 131

customer support contacting 318

D

darkness

copy options 81

e-mail options 89

fax options 111

scan options 119

date and time, fax

setting 105

daylight saving time, setting 105

Default Source menu 123

Defective flash detected [51] 257

delayed send

fax options 113

developer unit

replacing 218, 227

device and network settings

information

erasing 206

different paper sizes, copying 75

Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)

fax setup 97

digital telephone service

fax setup 99

directory list

printing 70

Disk full 62 257

Disk must be formatted for use in

this device 257

disk wiping 207

Disk Wiping menu 143

display

printer control panel 14

display troubleshooting

printer display is blank 271

display, printer control panel

adjusting brightness 202

disposing of printer hard disk 205

distinctive ring service, fax

connecting to 104

documents, printing

from Macintosh 64

from Windows 64

DSL filter 97

duplexing 76

E

Eco-Mode setting 199

edge erase

e-mail options 90

fax options 113

scan options 120

embedded solutions information erasing 206

Embedded Web Server 236

accessing 19

administrator settings 235

checking the status of parts 211

checking the status of supplies 211

copying settings to other printers 237

creating a fax destination shortcut 108

creating an FTP shortcut 114

creating e-mail shortcuts 84

initial fax setup 92

modifying confidential print settings 69, 237

networking settings 235

problem accessing 316

scanning to a computer using 116

setting up e-mail alerts 235

Embedded Web Server

Administrator's Guide

where to find 208, 235

emission

notices 321, 324, 325, 327, 330

encrypting the printer hard disk 207

enlarging a copy 76

envelopes

loading 47, 49

tips on using 56

environmental settings 198

display brightness, adjusting 202

Eco-Mode 199

Hibernate Mode 201

Hibernate Timeout 201

Quiet Mode 199

Schedule Power Modes 202

Sleep Mode 200

erasing hard disk memory 207

erasing non-volatile memory 206

erasing volatile memory 206

Error reading USB drive. Remove

USB. 257

Error reading USB hub. Remove

hub. 257

Ethernet network

preparing to set up for Ethernet printing 38

Ethernet network setup

using Macintosh 39

using Windows 39

Ethernet networking

Macintosh 39

Windows 39

Ethernet port 35

Ethernet setup

preparing for an 38

exporting a configuration

using the Embedded Web

Server 24

EXT port 35

exterior of the printer

cleaning 209

e-mail

canceling 88

e-mail alerts

low supply levels 235

paper jam 235

setting up 235

e-mail function

setting up 84

e-mail options

advanced imaging 90

custom job 90

darkness 89

edge erase 90

message 88

original size 88

page setup 90

recipient(s) 88

resolution 89

Save As Shortcut 88

send as 89

subject 88

transmission log 90

e-mail screen

options 88, 89, 90

E-mail Settings menu 169

e-mail shortcuts, creating

using the Embedded Web Server 84

e-mail, sending

using a shortcut number 86

using the address book 86

e-mailing

adding message line 87

adding subject line 87

changing output file type 87

creating shortcuts using the

Embedded Web Server 84

creating shortcuts using the

printer control panel 85

setting up e-mail function 84

using a shortcut number 86

using the address book 86

using the printer control panel 85

F

factory defaults

restoring 237

FAQ about color printing 299

fax

sending 106

sending using the printer control panel 105

fax and e-mail functions

setting up 310

fax and e-mail functions are not set

up 310

fax log

viewing 109

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)

menu 159

Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)

menu 167

fax name, setting 104

fax number, setting 104

fax options

advanced imaging 113

content source 112

content type 112

custom job 113

darkness 111

delayed send 113

edge erase 113

page setup 112

resolution 111

scan preview 113

transmission log 112

fax screen

options 112

fax setup

country- or region-specific 100

digital telephone service 99

DSL connection 97

standard telephone line connection 93

VoIP 98

fax troubleshooting

caller ID is not shown 306

can receive but not send faxes 309

can send but not receive

faxes 309

cannot send or receive a fax 306

received fax has poor print quality 311

faxing

blocking junk faxes 109

canceling a fax job 110

changing resolution 108

configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 105

creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 108

creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 108

distinctive ring service 104

fax setup 92

forwarding faxes 111

holding faxes 110

making a fax lighter or darker 109

sending a fax at a scheduled time 107

setting the date and time 105

setting the fax number 104

setting the outgoing fax name 104

viewing a fax log 109

FCC notices 324, 326, 330

file name

scan options 118

finding more information about the printer 9

finding printer IP address 18

Finishing menu 184

firmware card 26

flash drive

printing from 66

flash drives

supported file types 67

font sample list

printing 70

footer

inserting 79

Forms and Favorites

setting up 20

forwarding faxes 111

FTP address

creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 115

FTP options 118

FTP address, scanning to

using a shortcut number 115

using the printer control panel 115

FTP options

FTP address 118

FTP screen

options 119

FTP Settings menu 174

G

General Settings menu 145

green settings

Eco-Mode 199

Hibernate Mode 201

Hibernate Timeout 201

Quiet Mode 199

Schedule Power Modes 202

H

header

inserting 79

header/footer

copy options 83

held jobs 68

printing from a Macintosh computer 69

printing from Windows 69

Help menu 196

Hibernate Mode using 201

Hibernate Timeout setting 201

hiding icons on the home screen 19

holding faxes 110

home button

printer control panel 14

home screen

buttons, understanding 14

customizing 19

hiding icons 19

showing icons 19

home screen applications

configuring 20

finding information 20

home screen buttons

understanding 14

HTML menu 195

|

icons on the home screen hiding 19

showing 19

Image menu 196

imaging kit

replacing 218

imaging kits

ordering 213

importing a configuration

using the Embedded Web Server 24

Incompatible tray [x] [59] 257

Incorrect paper size, open [paper

source] [34] 258

indicator light

printer control panel 14

individual settings information erasing 206

initial fax setup 92

using the Embedded Web Server 92

Insert Tray [x] 258

inserting a header or footer 79

installing an optional card 31

installing options

order of installation 33

installing printer on a network

Ethernet networking 39

installing printer software 37 adding options 37

Insufficient memory for Flash

Memory Defragment operation [37] 258

Insufficient memory to collate job [37] 258

Insufficient memory to support

Resource Save feature [35] 258

Insufficient memory, some Held

Jobs were deleted [37] 258

Insufficient memory, some held

jobs will not be restored [37] 259

interior of the printer cleaning 209

internal options 26

IP address of computer finding 18

IP address, printer finding 18

IPv6 menu 137

J

jams

avoiding 239

locating doors and trays 240

locations 240

messages 240

jams, clearing

in automatic document feeder top cover 253

in fuser area 244

in manual feeder 251

in multipurpose feeder 251

in standard bin 241

Tray 1 249

Tray 2 249

Job Accounting menu 189

K

keypad

printer control panel 14

L

labels, paper

tips 56

letterhead

copying on 74

loading, multipurpose feeder 54

loading, trays 54

line filter 97

LINE port 35

linking trays 51, 53

Load [paper source] with [custom string] 259

Load [paper source] with [custom type name] 259

Load [paper source] with [paper size] 259

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] 260

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] 260

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] 260

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] 260

Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] 260

loading

250-sheet tray 44

550-sheet tray 44

650-sheet duo tray 44, 48

card stock 49

envelopes 47, 49

manual feeder 47

multipurpose feeder 49

transparencies 49

loading letterhead

paper orientation 54

lock, security 205

M

maintenance kit

ordering 213

Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 261

Maintenance kit nearly low

[80.xy] 261

Maintenance kit very low, [x]

estimated pages remain

[80.xy] 261

making copies using paper from

selected tray 75

manual feeder

loading 47

Max Speed and Max Yield using 65

memory

types installed on printer 205

memory card 26

installing 29

troubleshooting 272

Memory full [38] 261

menu settings

loading on multiple printers 237

menu settings page printing 43

menus

Active NIC 133

AppleTalk 138

Confidential Print 142

Copy Settings 154

Custom Names 131

Custom Scan Sizes 131

Custom Types 131

Default Source 123

diagram of 121

Disk Wiping 143

E-mail Settings 169

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 159

Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 167

Finishing 184

FTP Settings 174

General Settings 145

Help 196

HTML 195

Image 196

IPv6 137

Job Accounting 189

Miscellaneous 142

Network [x] 133

Network Card 135

Network Reports 135

Paper Loading 129

Paper Size/Type 123

Paper Texture 126

Paper Weight 128

PCL Emul 192

PDF 191

PostScript 191

Print Settings 181

Quality 186

Reports 132

Scan Settings 178

Security Audit Log 144

Set Date and Time 144

Setup 183

SMTP Setup menu 140

Standard Network 133

Standard USB 139

Substitute Size 126

Supplies 122

TCP/IP 136

Universal Setup 132

Utilities 190

Wireless 137

XPS 191

message

e-mail options 88

Miscellaneous menu 142

moving the printer 10, 234

Multi Send

adding a profile 22

setting up 22

multipurpose feeder

loading 49

MyShortcut

about 22

N

Network [x] menu 133

Network [x] software error

[54] 261

Network Card menu 135

Network Reports menu 135

network settings

Embedded Web Server 235

network setup page

printing 43

Networking Guide

where to find 235

noise emission levels 321

Non-Lexmark [color] [supply type], see User's Guide [33.xy] 262

non-volatile memory 205

erasing 206

Not enough free space in flash

memory for resources [52] 261

notices 320, 321, 322, 323, 324,

325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 331

number of remaining pages

estimate 211

0

optional card

installing 31

options

550-sheet tray 33

650-sheet duo tray 33

firmware cards 26

memory card 29

memory cards 26

updating in printer driver 37

options, copy screen

copy from 81

edge erase 82

margin shift 82

scale 81

options, touch-screen

copy 81, 82

e-mail 88, 89, 90

fax 112

FTP 119

ordering

imaging kits 213

maintenance kit 213

toner cartridges 212

waste toner bottle 214

original size

e-mail options 88

scan options 119

output file type

changing 87

overlay

copy options 83

P

page setup

e-mail options 90

fax options 112

scan options 120

paper

characteristics 57

different sizes, copying 75

letterhead 59

preprinted forms 59

recycled 59, 198

saving 79

selecting 58

storing 59

unacceptable 58

Universal size setting 44

paper feed troubleshooting

message remains after jam is cleared 274

paper jams

avoiding 239

paper jams, clearing

[x]-page jam, open front door [20y.xx] 247

[x]-page jam, open front door to clear fuser [202.xx] 244

[x]-page jam, open front door to clear duplex [23y.xx] 248

in automatic document feeder top cover 253

in fuser area 244

in manual feeder 251

in multipurpose feeder 251

in standard bin 241

Tray 1 249

Tray 2 249

Paper Loading menu 129

paper saver

copy options 83

paper size

setting 44

Paper Size/Type menu 123

paper sizes

supported by the printer 60

Paper Texture menu 126

paper type

setting 44

paper types

supported by printer 62

where to load 62

Paper Weight menu 128

paper weights

supported by printer 62

parts

checking status 211

checking, on the printer control panel 211

checking, using the Embedded Web Server 211

using genuine Lexmark 212

PCL Emul menu 192

PDF menu 191

Personal Identification Number method

using 41

phone splitter 98

photos

copying 73

placing separator sheets between copies 78

PostScript menu 191

power cord socket 35

preparing to set up the printer on

an Ethernet network 38

print irregularities 287

print job

canceling, from computer 71

print quality

cleaning the scanner glass 210

replacing a developer unit 227

replacing imaging kit 218

replacing the waste toner bottle 214

print quality troubleshooting blank pages 290

characters have jagged edges 282

clipped pages or images 282

gray background on prints 283

horizontal voids appear on prints 284

print irregularities 287

print is too dark 288

print is too light 289

printer is printing solid black pages 291

repeating print defects 292

shadow images appear on prints 292

skewed print 293

streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 294

streaked vertical lines appear on prints 295

toner fog or background shading appears on prints 296

toner rubs off 297

toner specks appear on prints 297

transparency print quality is poor 298

uneven print density 298

vertical voids appear on prints 298

Print Settings menu 181

print troubleshooting

error reading flash drive 276

held jobs do not print 275

incorrect characters print 276

incorrect margins on prints 285

jammed pages are not reprinted 273

job prints from wrong tray 277

job prints on wrong paper 277

jobs do not print 279

Large jobs do not collate 277

multiple-language PDF files do not print 278

paper curl 286

paper frequently jams 274

print job takes longer than expected 280

printing slows down 278

tray linking does not work 281

unexpected page breaks occur 281

printer

configurations 11

minimum clearances 10

models 11

moving 10, 234

selecting a location 10

shipping 234

printer control panel

factory defaults, restoring 237

indicator light 16

Sleep button light 16

using 14

printer control panel, virtual

display

using the Embedded Web Server 235

printer hard disk

disposing of 205

encrypting 207

wiping 207

printer hard disk encryption 207

printer hard disk memory erasing 207

printer information

where to find 9

printer IP address

finding 18

printer is printing blank pages 290

printer messages

[Color] cartridge low [88.xy] 256

[Color] cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 256

[Color] cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy] 256

[Type] imaging kit low [84.xy] 268

[Type] imaging kit nearly low [84.xy] 268

[Type] imaging kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy] 268

[x]-page jam, clear manual feeder [251.xx] 251

[x]-page jam, clear multipurpose feeder [250.xx] 251

[x]-page jam, clear standard bin [203.xx] 241

[x]-page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 253

[x]-page jam, open tray [x] [24y.xx] 249

Adjusting color 255

Change [paper source] to [custom string] 255

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] 255

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] 255

Close door 255

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx] 256

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39] 256

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57] 256

Defective flash detected [51] 257 Disk full 62 257

Disk must be formatted for use in this device 257

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB. 257

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub. 257

Incompatible tray [x] [59] 257

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34] 258

Insert Tray [x] 258

Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37] 258

Insufficient memory to collate job [37] 258

Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35] 258

Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37] 258

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37] 259

Load [paper source] with [custom string] 259

Load [paper source] with [custom type name] 259

Load [paper source] with [paper size] 259

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] 260

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] 260

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] 260

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] 260

Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] 260

Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 261

Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy] 261

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy] 261

Memory full [38] 261

Network [x] software error [54] 261

Non-Lexmark [color] [supply type], see User's Guide [33.xy] 262

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52] 261

Reinstall missing or unresponsive [color] cartridge [31.xy] 262

Reload printed pages in Tray [x] 263

Remove defective disk [61] 264

Remove packaging material, [area name] 263

Remove paper from standard output bin 263

Replace [color] cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy] 263

Replace [color] cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy] 263

Replace [type] imaging kit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy] 263

Replace all originals if restarting job. 264

Replace defective [color] cartridge [31.xy] 264

Replace defective [type] imaging kit [31.xy] 264

Replace jammed originals if restarting job. 264

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy] 265

Replace missing [color] cartridge [31.xy] 265

Replace missing [type] imaging kit [31.xy] 265

Replace missing or unresponsive [type] imaging kit [31.xy] 262

Replace missing waste toner bottle [82.xy] 265

Replace unsupported [color] cartridge [32.xy] 265

Replace unsupported [type] imaging kit [32.xy] 265

Replace waste toner bottle [82.xy] 265

Restore held jobs? 266

Scanner automatic feeder cover open 266

Scanner disabled by admin [840.01] 266

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02] 266

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx] 266

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx] 266

SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator. 266

Some held jobs were not restored 266

Standard network software error [54] 267

Standard USB port disabled [56] 267

Supply needed to complete job 267

Too many flash options installed [58] 267

Too many trays attached [58] 267

Unformatted flash detected [53] 268

Unsupported USB hub, please remove 257

Waste toner bottle nearly full [82.xy] 268

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator. 268

printer options troubleshooting internal option is not detected 271

memory card 272

tray problems 272

printer problems, solving basic 269

printer security

information on 208

printer software installing 37

printing

black-and-white 64

canceling, from printer control panel 70

directory list 70

font sample list 70

forms 64

from flash drive 66

from Macintosh 64

from Windows 64

Max Speed and Max Yield 65

menu settings page 43

network setup page 43

printing a directory list 70

printing a document 64

printing a font sample list 70

printing a menu settings page 43

printing a network setup page 43

printing confidential and other held jobs

from a Macintosh computer 69

from Windows 69

printing forms 64

printing from a flash drive 66

printing in black and white 64

publications

where to find 9

Push Button Configuration method using 41

Q

Quality menu 186

Quiet Mode 199

R

recipient(s)

e-mail options 88

recycled paper

using 59, 198

recycling

Lexmark packaging 203

Lexmark products 203

toner cartridges 203

reducing a copy 76

reducing noise 199

Reinstall missing or unresponsive

[color] cartridge [31.xy] 262

Reload printed pages in Tray

[x] 263

remaining pages, number of estimate 211

Remote Operator Panel setting up 24

Remove defective disk [61] 264

Remove packaging material, [area name] 263

Remove paper from standard output bin 263

repeat print jobs 68

printing from a Macintosh computer 69

printing from Windows 69

repeating print defects 292

Replace [color] cartridge, 0

estimated pages remain [88.xy] 263

Replace [color] cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy] 263

Replace [type] imaging kit, 0

estimated pages remain [84.xy] 263

Replace all originals if restarting job. 264

Replace defective [color] cartridge [31.xy] 264

Replace defective [type] imaging kit

[31.xy] 264

Replace jammed originals if restarting job. 264

Replace maintenance kit, 0

estimated pages remain [80.xy] 265

Replace missing [color] cartridge [31.xy] 265

Replace missing [type] imaging kit [31.xy] 265

Replace missing or unresponsive [type] imaging kit [31.xy] 262

Replace missing waste toner bottle [82.xy] 265

Replace unsupported [color] cartridge [32.xy] 265

Replace unsupported [type]

imaging kit [32.xy] 265

Replace waste toner bottle [82.xy] 265

reports viewing 235

Reports menu 132

reserve print jobs

printing from a Macintosh computer 69

printing from Windows 69

resolution

e-mail options 89

fax options 111

scan options 119

resolution, fax changing 108

Restore held jobs? 266

restoring factory default

settings 237

RJ-11 adapter 100

S

safety information 7,8

Save As Shortcut

copy options 82

e-mail options 88

scan options 118

saving paper 79

scan options

custom job 120

darkness 119

edge erase 120

file name 118

original size 119

page setup 120

resolution 119

Save As Shortcut 118

Scan Preview 120

send as 119

transmission log 120

Scan Preview

scan options 120

scan preview

fax options 113

scan screen

advanced imaging 120

content source 119

content type 119

Scan Settings menu 178

Scan to Computer setting up 117

Scan to Network

setting up 23

using 114

scan troubleshooting

cannot scan from a computer 315

partial document or photo scans 315

scan job was not successful 313

scanner unit does not close 303, 313

scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 314

scanner

automatic document feeder (ADF) 13

functions 12

scanner glass 13

Scanner automatic feeder cover open 266

Scanner disabled by admin [840.01] 266

Scanner disabled. Contact system

administrator if problem persists. [840.02] 266

scanner glass

cleaning 210

copying using 73

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx] 266

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner

[2yy.xx] 266

scanning

from a flash drive 118

quick copy 72

to a computer 117

to a computer using the Embedded Web Server 116

scanning to a computer 117 using the Embedded Web Server 116

scanning to a flash drive 118

scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 114

using a shortcut number 115

using the printer control panel 115

scanning to network

destinations 114

Schedule Power Modes using 202

security modifying confidential print settings 69, 237

Security Audit Log menu 144

security lock 205

security lock port 35

security settings information erasing 206

security Web page where to find 208

selecting a location for the

printer 10

selecting paper 58

send as e-mail options 89 scan options 119

sending a fax 106

sending a fax using the printer

control panel 105

sending an e-mail using the printer

control panel 85

sending fax using shortcuts 106 using the address book 107

sending fax at a scheduled time 107

separator sheets copy options 83

Set Date and Time menu 144

setting paper size 44 paper type 44 TCP/IP address 136

setting Hibernate Timeout 201

setting the fax number 104

setting the outgoing fax name 104

setting the Universal paper size 44 setting up e-mail alerts 235

setting up fax country- or region-specific 100 digital telephone service 99

DSL connection 97

standard telephone line connection 93

VoIP connection 98

setting up fax and e-mail

functions 310

setting up the printer on an Ethernet network (Macintosh only) 39 on an Ethernet network (Windows only) 39

Setup menu 183

shipping the printer 234

shortcuts, creating copy screen 74 e-mail 84

e-mail screen 85

fax destination 108

FTP address 115

FTP destination 114

showing icons on the home screen 19

sides (duplex) copy options 81

sleep button printer control panel 14

Sleep Mode adjusting 200

SMTP server not set up. Contact

system administrator. 266 SMTP Setup menu 140

Some held jobs were not

restored 266 Standard Network menu 133

Standard network software error [54] 267

standard tray loading 44

Standard USB menu 139

Standard USB port disabled [56] 267

start button printer control panel 14

statement of volatility 205

status of parts checking 211

status of supplies checking 211

storing paper 59 supplies 209

storing print jobs 68

streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 294

streaked vertical lines appear on prints 295

subject and message information adding to e-mail 87

Substitute Size menu 126

supplies checking status 211

checking, on the printer control panel 211

checking, using the Embedded Web Server 211

conserving 198

storing 209

using genuine Lexmark 212

using recycled paper 198

Supplies menu 122

supplies, ordering imaging kits 213

maintenance kit 213

toner cartridges 212

waste toner bottle 214

Supply needed to complete job 267

supply notifications configuring 236

supported flash drives 67

T

TCP/IP menu 136

telecommunication

notices 326, 327, 328, 329

the scanner does not respond 312 tips

card stock 57

labels, paper 56

on using envelopes 56

on using letterhead 54

transparencies 55

tips on using envelopes 56

tips on using letterhead 54

toner cartridges

ordering 212

recycling 203

replacing 225

toner darkness

adjusting 65

Too many flash options installed

[58] 267

Too many trays attached [58] 267

touch screen

buttons 16

transmission log

e-mail options 90

fax options 112

scan options 120

transparencies

copying on 73

loading 49

tips on using 55

trays

linking 51, 53

unlinking 51, 53

troubleshooting

an application error has occurred 316

cannot open Embedded Web Server 316

checking an unresponsive printer 269

contacting customer support 318

FAQ about color printing 299

fax and e-mail functions are not set up 310

solving basic printer problems 269

the scanner does not respond 312

troubleshooting, color quality

color of print and color on computer screen do not match 302

print appears tinted 302

prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected 301

troubleshooting, copy

copier does not respond 303

partial document or photo copies 305

poor copy quality 304

poor scanned image quality 314

scanner unit does not close 303, 313

troubleshooting, display

printer display is blank 271

troubleshooting, fax

caller ID is not shown 306

can receive but not send faxes 309

can send but not receive faxes 309

cannot send or receive a fax 306

received fax has poor print quality 311

troubleshooting, paper feed

message remains after jam is cleared 274

troubleshooting, print

error reading flash drive 276

held jobs do not print 275

incorrect characters print 276

incorrect margins on prints 285

jammed pages are not reprinted 273

job prints from wrong tray 277

job prints on wrong paper 277

jobs do not print 279

Large jobs do not collate 277

multiple-language PDF files do not print 278

paper curl 286

paper frequently jams 274

print job takes longer than expected 280

printing slows down 278

tray linking does not work 281

unexpected page breaks occur 281

troubleshooting, print quality blank pages 290

characters have jagged edges 282

clipped pages or images 282

gray background on prints 283

horizontal voids appear on prints 284

print irregularities 287

print is too dark 288

print is too light 289

printer is printing solid black pages 291

repeating print defects 292

shadow images appear on prints 292

skewed print 293

streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 294

streaked vertical lines appear on prints 295

toner fog or background shading appears on prints 296

toner rubs off 297

toner specks appear on prints 297

transparency print quality is poor 298

uneven print density 298

vertical voids appear on prints 298

troubleshooting, printer options

internal option is not detected 271

memory card 272

tray problems 272

troubleshooting, scan

cannot scan from a computer 315

partial document or photo scans 315

scan job was not successful 313

scanner unit does not close 303, 313

scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 314

U

understanding the home screen 14 uneven print density 298

Unformatted flash detected [53] 268

Universal Paper Size setting 44

Universal Setup menu 132

unlinking trays 51, 53

Unsupported USB hub, please remove 257

updating options in printer driver 37

USB port 35

printer control panel 14

using a shortcut number scanning to an FTP address 115

using Forms and Favorites 64

using Hibernate Mode 201

using Max Speed and Max Yield 65

using Schedule Power Modes 202

using shortcuts

sending fax 106

using the address book sending fax 107

using the touch-screen buttons 16

Utilities menu 190

V

verify print jobs 68

printing from a Macintosh

computer 69

printing from Windows 69

vertical voids appear on prints 298

viewing

reports 235

viewing a fax log 109

virtual display

checking, using Embedded Web

Server 235

voice mail

setting up 93

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

fax setup 98

VoIP adapter 98

volatile memory 205

erasing 206

volatility

statement of 205

W

waste toner bottle

ordering 214

replacing 214

Waste toner bottle nearly full

[82.xy] 268

Weblink server not set up. Contact

system administrator. 268

wiping the printer hard disk 207

Wireless menu 137

wireless network

configuration information 40

wireless network setup

using the Embedded Web

Server 42

wireless setup wizard

using 41

X

XPS menu 191